Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center

Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center
2010 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual
In Brief ........................................................... 1-1
Instrument Panel ........................................ 1-2
Initial Drive Information
............................... 1-4
Vehicle Features
...................................... 1-15
Performance and Maintenance
................... 1-21
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 2-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 2-2
Front Seats ............................................... 2-3
Rear Seats .............................................. 2-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 2-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 2-33
Airbag System
......................................... 2-58
Restraint System Check
............................ 2-74
Features and Controls ..................................... 3-1
Keys
........................................................ 3-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 3-9
Windows ................................................. 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 3-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 3-22
M
Mirrors .................................................... 3-36
Object Detection Systems .......................... 3-40
Universal Home Remote System
................ 3-48
Storage Areas
......................................... 3-55
Sunroof
.................................................. 3-57
Instrument Panel ............................................. 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 4-3
Climate Controls
...................................... 4-36
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 4-46
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 4-61
Audio System(s) ....................................... 4-88
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 5-2
Towing
................................................... 5-24
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 6-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-40
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 6-43
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 6-44
Tires
...................................................... 6-46
Appearance Care
..................................... 6-91
Vehicle Identification
................................. 6-99
Electrical System
.................................... 6-100
Capacities and Specifications
................... 6-109
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 8-18
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name DTS
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent
to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle
to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Division wherever it appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25897010 A First Printing
©
2009 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Vehicle Symbols
Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid
or reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
iv
Charging System
I:
Cruise Control
::
Oil Pressure
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
g:
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
O:
Exterior Lamps
}:
Power
#:
Fog Lamps
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
.:
Fuel Gage
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
+:
Fuses
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
i:
j:
*:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Instrument Panel ..............................................1-2
Initial Drive Information ....................................1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................1-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................1-5
Door Locks ....................................................1-5
Trunk Release ...............................................1-6
Windows .......................................................1-6
Seat Adjustment .............................................1-7
Heated and Ventilated Seats ............................1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment ...............................1-8
Safety Belt ....................................................1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag ...............1-9
Mirror Adjustment .........................................1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................1-11
Interior Lighting ............................................1-12
Exterior Lighting ...........................................1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer ...............................1-13
Climate Controls ...........................................1-14
In Brief
Vehicle Features .............................................1-15
Radio(s) ......................................................1-15
Satellite Radio ..............................................1-17
Portable Audio Devices ..................................1-17
Steering Wheel Controls ................................1-17
Bluetooth® ...................................................1-18
Navigation System ........................................1-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................1-18
Cruise Control ..............................................1-20
Power Outlets ..............................................1-20
Performance and Maintenance .........................1-21
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................1-21
StabiliTrak® ..................................................1-21
Tire Pressure Monitor ....................................1-21
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................1-22
Engine Oil Life System ..................................1-22
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .....................1-22
Roadside Service ..........................................1-23
OnStar® ......................................................1-23
1-1
Instrument Panel
Console-Shift Model shown, Column-Shift Model similar
1-2
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4-41.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4-61.
C. Exterior Lamps on page 4-25.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4-47.
E. Horn on page 4-3.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-119.
G. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
on page 3-40 and Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4-15 (If Equipped).
H. Analog Clock on page 4-35.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
J. Audio System(s) on page 4-88.
K. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 3-12.
L. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-31.
M. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 3-46.
N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4-5.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
Hood Release on page 6-11.
Parking Brake on page 3-30.
Heated Steering Wheel on page 4-4 (If Equipped).
Cruise Control on page 4-12 or Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 4-15.
Tilt Wheel on page 4-3. Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column on page 4-4
(If Equipped).
Dual Climate Control System on page 4-36.
Traction Control System Button (Console-Shift
Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5-6.
Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3-27.
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-34.
Glove Box on page 3-55. Valet Lockout Switch on
page 3-18.
1-3
Initial Drive Information
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press K again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press
Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold
open the trunk.
V for approximately one second to
L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
Press
the panic alarm.
Press
L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3-3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3-4.
1-4
Remote Vehicle Start
Canceling a Remote Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start:
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate control system may
come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the
steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can
be extended only once.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold
/ until the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-7.
Door Locks
From the outside, unlock the door using either the key
or the RKE transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs located at the top of the door panel
near the window.
1-5
Power Door Locks
Windows
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
"
(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
For more information, see:
• Door Locks on page 3-9.
• Power Door Locks on page 3-10.
• Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-4.
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
transmitter, there is a remote release V button located
to the left of the steering wheel next to the instrument
panel brightness control. Press to open the trunk.
See Trunk on page 3-12.
1-6
On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has
a switch that controls only that window.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up
to raise it.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3-15.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Seat Adjustment
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are on the outboard side of
the seat.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 2-8.
Raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the front or rear of the control up or down.
See Power Seats on page 2-3.
1-7
Power Lumbar Adjustment
Heated and Ventilated Seats
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
On vehicles with heated and ventilated seats, the
controls are located on the front doors and the ignition
must be on to use the feature.
z:
Press to heat the seat and seatback.
+:
Press to heat the seatback.
H:
Press to cool the seat and seatback.
For more information see Heated and Ventilated Seats
on page 2-5.
Press the front or rear of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support.
See Power Lumbar on page 2-4.
Head Restraint Adjustment
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on page 2-2.
1-8
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver
airbags and roof-rail airbags are not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
•
•
•
•
•
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2-12.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2-17.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-67 for
important information.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-26.
Lap Belt on page 2-32.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-45.
1-9
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power folding mirrors are
located on the driver
door armrest.
The vehicle may also have an automatic dimming
feature on the driver side mirror that adjusts for the glare
of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled
by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror.
For more information, see:
• Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 3-37
• Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3-36
Interior Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror. Automatic dimming reduces the glare of
lights from behind the vehicle. The dimming feature
comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time
the vehicle is started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3-36.
Press the selector switch (A) or (B) to choose either the
left or right outside mirror. Then press the control pad
to move the mirror to the desired direction.
To fold the mirrors:
Press the selector switch (C) to fold the mirrors out,
then press (D) to fold the mirror toward the vehicle.
1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment
This feature allows the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted.
The adjustment lever is
located on the left side of
the steering column.
For vehicles with a power tilt wheel control:
• Push the control up or down to tilt the steering
wheel up or down.
• Push the control forward or rearward to move the
steering wheel toward the front or rear of the
vehicle.
1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up
or down.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4-3 or Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column on page 4-4 (If Equipped).
2. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
1-11
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Courtesy Lamps
This control is located on
the instrument panel, to
the left of the steering
wheel.
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when
any door is opened and it is dark outside.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened
and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on
or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
For more information, see:
•
•
•
•
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-31.
P : Turns off the exterior lamps, except Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps at normal
brightness, other exterior lamps and IntelliBeam™.
; : Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
exterior lamps.
2 : Manual operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps.
Entry Lighting on page 4-31.
#:
Parade Dimming on page 4-31.
For more information, see:
• Exterior Lamps on page 4-25.
• Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4-29.
• Fog Lamps on page 4-30.
• Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4-29.
Footwell Lamps on page 4-32.
1-12
Press to turn on the fog lamps.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
6:
1:
9:
Slow wipes.
Fast wipes.
Turns the wipers off.
J : Press and release this paddle, located at the top
of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer
fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4-10 and Windshield
Washer on page 4-11.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
8:
6:
Use for a single wiping cycle.
Delays wiping cycle.
1-13
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with Rear
Climate Control
Dual Climate Control System
A. Fan Control
B. Display
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Driver and
Passenger
Temperature
Controls
E.
F.
G.
H.
Air Conditioning
Outside Air or AUX
Air Recirculation
PASS (Passenger
Climate Control)
I. Rear Window
Defogger
See Dual Climate Control System on page 4-36. For
vehicles with rear climate control, see Rear Climate
Control System on page 4-42.
1-14
Vehicle Features
a:
Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨:
Radio(s)
Press to seek or scan stations.
4
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3/WMA, and RDS
Features): Press this button to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station,
or MP3/WMA song. When information is not available,
No Info displays.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4-88.
Storing a Favorite Station
Radio with CD
For vehicles with an XM radio, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
See Radio(s) (MP3) on page 4-92.
O:
Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™. The
selection displays.
1-15
Setting the Clock
The vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. To use the
digital radio clock and the analog clock, see detailed
instructions in Setting the Clock on page 4-89 for your
specific audio system.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize
both clocks.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock
(Single CD Player)
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting
menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
1-16
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
Setting the Time and Date
(Single CD Player)
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
4. Increase or decrease the time or date by
turning a clockwise or counterclockwise.
Satellite Radio
Steering Wheel Controls
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
If equipped, these controls
are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
• www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
• www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) (MP3)
on page 4-92.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input, located on the
audio faceplate. External devices such as iPod®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD changers, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) input jack.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under Radio(s)
(MP3) on page 4-92.
w : Press to go to the next radio station stored as a
favorite, or the next track, if a CD/DVD is playing.
b g: Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth®
systems.
+
e
−
e:
Increases or decreases volume.
c x : Press to go to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite, the next track, if a CD/DVD is playing,
to reject an incoming call, or to end a current call.
1-17
SRCE: Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for
vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
¨:
Press seek the next radio station, or to select
tracks on a CD or DVD.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4-119.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4-108.
1-18
Navigation System
The vehicle’s navigation system provides detailed maps
of most major freeways and roads throughout the
United States and Canada. After a destination has been
set, the system provides turn-by-turn instructions for
reaching the destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points of interest (POI),
such as banks, airports, restaurants, and more.
See the vehicle’s Navigation System manual for more
information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems and enables access to the
personalization menu.
V : Press to reset certain DIC features and to
acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them
from the DIC display.
y z:
Press to scroll up and down the menu items.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4-61.
Vehicle Customization
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
3:
Press to scroll through the trip and fuel displays.
T:
Press to scroll through the vehicle information
displays.
U:
Press to customize the feature settings on your
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4-80
for more information.
Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the
DIC buttons on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. These features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Language
Door Lock and Unlock Settings
Lighting
Chime Volume
Memory Settings
Remote Start
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4-80.
1-19
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is
located inside the lower storage area. Some vehicles
may have an outlet on the right front lower part of
the driver’s seat and under the climate control system
next to the ashtray.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat
area located on the door armrests next to the
ashtrays.
To use the outlet, remove the cover.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-34.
I:
Turns on the cruise control system.
+ RES: Press to accelerate or resume speed.
SET–: Press to set the speed.
[:
Press to cancel cruise control.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4-12.
For vehicles with adaptive cruise control, see Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15.
1-20
Performance and Maintenance
Tire Pressure Monitor
Traction Control System (TCS)
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
• To turn off traction control, press and release i in
front of the shift lever. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is displayed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67.
• Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-6.
StabiliTrak®
The vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system that
assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns on automatically
every time the vehicle is started. The system cannot be
turned off.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-5.
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected. The proper tire pressures for your vehicle
are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label
located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is first
started and then turn off as you drive. This may be an
early indicator that your tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about
low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly
tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-57 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-58.
1-21
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used
to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6-71 for
complete operating information.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when
it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter. The
oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an
oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the DIC INFO button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays.
3. Press and hold the DIC INFO RESET button until
100% displays.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
1-22
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Roadside Service
OnStar®
U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
As the owner of a new Cadillac, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Service program which is
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Service and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Service, and relay exact location to
get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to
the vehicle to see if you need help.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-23
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X : Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance,
Turn-by-Turn Navigation and Hands-Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more information see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide or visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press Q to speak with an OnStar
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the
glove box.
1-24
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network capacity and
reception when the service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed, or
if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual advisor
feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the vehicle
also sends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can
provide services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-119 for more
information.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request
a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-25
✍ NOTES
1-26
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints ...............................................2-2
Front Seats ......................................................2-3
Power Seats ..................................................2-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................2-4
Massaging Lumbar .........................................2-4
Heated and Ventilated Seats ............................2-5
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .........2-6
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................2-8
Center Seat ...................................................2-9
Rear Seats .....................................................2-10
Heated Seats ...............................................2-10
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ........................2-11
Power Lumbar ..............................................2-11
Safety Belts ...................................................2-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................2-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................2-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................2-31
Lap Belt ......................................................2-32
Safety Belt Extender .....................................2-33
Child Restraints .............................................2-33
Older Children ..............................................2-33
Infants and Young Children ............................2-37
Child Restraint Systems .................................2-41
Where to Put the Restraint .............................2-44
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) .................................2-45
Securing a Child Restraint
in a Rear Seat Position ..............................2-51
Securing a Child Restraint
in the Center Front Seat Position .................2-53
Securing a Child Restraint
in the Right Front Seat Position ...................2-54
Airbag System ...............................................2-58
Where Are the Airbags? ................................2-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................2-63
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................2-65
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....2-66
Passenger Sensing System ............................2-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........2-72
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................2-73
Restraint System Check ..................................2-74
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................2-75
2-1
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
2-2
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the seats.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
The front seats also have power reclining seatbacks.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 2-8.
On vehicles with the memory feature, memory settings
can be programmed and recalled for seat positions. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-6.
2-3
Power Lumbar
Massaging Lumbar
The power lumbar controls
are located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
Press the front or rear of the lumbar control to increase
or decrease support. Press the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the support mechanism.
2-4
On vehicles with this
feature, the switch is
located on the outboard
side of the front seats
behind the lumbar switch.
Press the switch to turn the massaging lumbar feature
on. The ignition must be on for this feature to work. The
massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes. To stop
massage, press the massaging lumbar switch again or
press the power lumbar switch.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
Press each button to turn on the desired feature. A light
on that button will display indicating which feature is on.
On vehicles with heated and ventilated seats, the
ignition must be on to use the feature.
There are three temperature settings for each feature.
A column of three lights next to the buttons will display
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or low.
Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights
indicate medium and one light indicates the lowest
setting.
The buttons are located on
the front doors.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will decrease one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
Driver’s Side Buttons
shown
J (Heated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Press this
button to heat the seat cushion and seatback.
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to heat the
seatback.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is
cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-4. When the key is inserted into the ignition and
the ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will
turn off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press
the desired button.
H (Ventilated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Press
this button to cool the seat cushion and seatback.
2-5
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
To save positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the previous steps and
pressing button 2 for a second driver.
On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are
located on the driver door panel. The controls are
used to program and recall memory settings for the
driver seat, outside mirror, and steering wheel position if
the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature.
2-6
To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move to
the position previously stored for the identified
driver. You will hear a single beep.
If you use the RKE transmitter to enter the vehicle and
the remote recall memory feature is on, automatic
seat and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORY
SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 4-80 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror
buttons.
If something has blocked the driver seat and/or the
steering column while recalling a memory position, the
driver seat and/or the steering column recall may
stop. If this happens remove the obstruction, then press
the appropriate control for the area that is not recalling
for two seconds. Try recalling the memory position again
by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the
memory position is still not recalling, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
Easy Exit Recall
The control for this feature is located on the driver door
panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver seat will move back, and if the
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature, the power telescopic steering column will
move up and forward.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic
seat and power telescopic steering column movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80 for more information.
Further programming for automatic seat and steering
wheel movement can be done using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can select or not select
the following:
• The easy exit recall feature
• The memory seat recall feature
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80.
2-7
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The seats have power
reclining seatbacks. Use
the vertical power seat
control located on
the outboard side of
the seat.
{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
• Press the control toward the rear of the vehicle to
recline the seatback.
• Press the control toward the front of the vehicle to
raise the seatback.
2-8
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Center Seat
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
The vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat can
be converted to a storage area by lowering the
seatback. See Center Flex Storage Unit on page 3-56.
2-9
Rear Seats
Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A light on
that button will display to show which feature is on.
Heated Seats
Each feature has three temperature settings indicated
by three lights next to the buttons. The highest
setting shows three lights, two is medium and one is
the lowest.
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must
be on.
The buttons are located on
the rear doors.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
2-10
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will go down one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 3-12.
The rear lumbar support
controls are located on the
rear doors in front of the
heated seat buttons.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard
rear seat positions.
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the front of
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up
and down to adjust the location of the support.
2-11
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
2-12
{ WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-49
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
2-13
Put someone on it.
2-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-16
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2-33 or
Infants and Young Children on page 2-37. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-17
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position
(if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 2-32 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2-67 for more information.
2-26
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2-33.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the
safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on
the stitching near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
2-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Press the release
button (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position. The
adjuster can be moved up
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
2-28
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 2-75.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides
for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. If
not, they are available through your dealer/retailer. The
guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older
children who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed the comfort guide positions the
shoulder belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
rear side of the seatback.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-29
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described earlier in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
pocket on the side of the seatback.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-31
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-26.
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-32
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it
for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
2-33
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2-26 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
2-34
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-26.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
2-35
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-36
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
2-37
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
2-38
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-39
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ WARNING:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-40
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{ WARNING:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
2-41
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
2-42
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2-45 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-43
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-67 for
additional information.
2-44
{ WARNING:
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-45
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-46
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
2-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ WARNING:
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2-44 for additional
information.
2-48
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-49
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the headrest or head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
in between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-50
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2-45 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the
vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-45 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2-44.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
2-51
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-52
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{ WARNING:
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-45 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
2-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2-44.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2-67 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-51 for more information, including
important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-67 for
additional information.
2-54
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2-45 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-45 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should light
and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-51.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
2-55
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-56
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2-67 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
•
•
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
The vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
2-58
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2-63.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
2-59
Where Are the Airbags?
{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 2-33 or
Infants and Young Children on page 2-37.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-50
for more information.
2-60
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
2-61
{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-62
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the right
front passenger’s seat. The passenger seat position
sensor and passenger safety belt buckle switch provide
information that is used to determine if the airbags should
deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
2-63
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag
that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity,
seat location, and safety belt status using electronic
frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors which enable
the sensing system to monitor the position of the front
passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward
position. For more rearward front seating positions,
the passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth
(a full deployment), based on safety belt status and
the crash severity measured early in the event. (Always
wear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 2-58. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
2-64
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the
side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2-63 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2-65.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
2-66
{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If
you have breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
{ WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 8-19.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
are visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the system check.
2-67
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-51.
The passenger sensing system turns off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver
airbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
2-68
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-51.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-50
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
2-69
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-54.
2-70
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2-2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-71
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-17.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
2-72
{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-67.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and
airbag wiring.
2-73
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-50 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-49 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6-95.
2-74
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-65. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-50.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-75
✍ NOTES
2-76
Section 3
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................3-4
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................3-7
Doors and Locks .............................................3-9
Door Locks ....................................................3-9
Central Door Unlocking System ......................3-10
Power Door Locks ........................................3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............3-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................3-10
Lockout Protection ........................................3-11
Trunk ..........................................................3-12
Windows ........................................................3-14
Power Windows ............................................3-15
Sun Visors ...................................................3-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................3-18
Valet Lockout Switch .....................................3-18
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation .................................................3-21
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................3-22
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................3-22
Ignition Positions ..........................................3-23
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................3-24
Starting the Engine .......................................3-24
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................3-26
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................3-27
Performance Shifting .....................................3-29
Parking Brake ..............................................3-30
Shifting Into Park ..........................................3-31
Shifting Out of Park ......................................3-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................3-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................3-34
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................3-35
Mirrors ...........................................................3-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................3-36
Compass .....................................................3-36
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................3-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................3-38
Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................3-39
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................3-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................3-39
3-1
Section 3
Features and Controls
Object Detection Systems ...............................3-40
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) .........................................3-40
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) .........................3-43
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......................3-46
Universal Home Remote System ......................3-48
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) ............................3-49
3-2
Storage Areas ................................................3-55
Glove Box ...................................................3-55
Cupholders ..................................................3-55
Front Storage Area .......................................3-55
Center Console Storage .................................3-55
Center Flex Storage Unit ...............................3-56
Floor Mats ...................................................3-56
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................3-56
Convenience Net ..........................................3-56
Sunroof .........................................................3-57
Keys
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The master key is used for the driver door, ignition, and
glove box.
The valet key is used for the driver door and ignition.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3-4.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the engine
from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-7 for additional
information.
3-4
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again within
five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4-80 for additional information.
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3-19.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If
enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80. Pressing K may disarm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 3-19.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must be
in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-6 and DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4-80 for more
information.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission
must be in P (Park).
3-5
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it. See RELEARN REMOTE
KEY under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch, located above the
metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter.
3-6
Remote Vehicle Start
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start
the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts
up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. When
the remote start system is active, the climate control
system will heat and cool the inside of the vehicle
according to the previous settings of the system before
turning the vehicle off. The rear window defogger
will be turned on by the climate control system when it
is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they
will also turn on when it is cold outside. See Heated and
Ventilated Seats on page 2-5 for additional information.
Cooled seats are not activated during a remote start.
Normal operation of the climate control system will
return after the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Dual
Climate Control System on page 4-36.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3-4 for
additional information.
/
(Remote Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press
and hold the remote start button for at least
four seconds. Pressing the remote start button
again after the vehicle has started will turn off the
ignition.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
3-7
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
To manually shut off a remote start:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that
may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and
release the transmitter lock button and then press and
hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter
again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time
has expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining
minutes. For example, if the lock button and then
the remote start buttons are pressed again after
five minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes are
added and you now have 15 minutes of engine running.
The added ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
3-8
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
with the ignition key before you can use the remote
start feature again.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is
an emission control system malfunction.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80 for additional information.
See Engine Exhaust on page 3-34 for important safety
information when using remote start in a closed garage.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. See your
dealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer’s
remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors with the key or
RKE transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
From the outside, use either the key or the
RKE transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located
at the top of the door panel near the window.
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.
3-9
Central Door Unlocking System
The vehicle has a central door unlocking mode. When
unlocking the driver door, the other doors can be
unlocked at the same time by turning the key clockwise
in the door lock cylinder twice.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
"
(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q
(Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
The vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The doors
will unlock every time the vehicle is stopped and the
shift lever is moved into P (Park).
3-10
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
P (Park), have the person use the manual lock knob
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lock
knob or power door lock switch to lock the door.
The door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various lock and
unlock settings. For programming information, see
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4-80.
Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.
To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has
the following:
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do
the following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock and
then the driver door will unlock. It is always
recommended that the ignition key is removed from the
vehicle when locking the doors.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds
or longer.
3-11
Trunk
{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
3-12
Remote Trunk Release
V (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk
release button is located to the left of the steering wheel
next to the instrument panel brightness control. Press
the button to open the trunk. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet lockout switch
must be off to use this button.
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on
the RKE transmitter to open the trunk. To disable
this feature, see Valet Lockout Switch on page 3-18.
The trunk can be accessed using the Rear Seat
Pass-Through. See “Rear Seat Pass-Through” following
this section.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull
the release handle to open the trunk from the inside.
Rear Seat Pass-Through
The vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This door
allows access to the trunk from inside the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down for the
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through
door, move the release up. To close the door, raise it
and push it until it latches.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
3-13
Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-14
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located on
the driver door.
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for
up and two positions for down movement. Press
the switch to the first position to lower the window to the
desired level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3-24.
3-15
Express-Down/Up Windows
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to
be raised and lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature.
The express mode can be canceled at any time by
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction
or condition is removed.
3-16
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
{ WARNING:
If express override is activated, the window will not
reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Programming the Power Windows
Window Lockout
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
o
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
(Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver door near the window
switches.
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using the driver window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
Sun Visors
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
Swing down the visor to block out glare. The visors also
have side-to-side slide capability.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.
The light will come on when the cover is opened. It
will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has
the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or
down to brighten or dim the light.
3-17
Rear Power Sunshade
Theft-Deterrent Systems
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the
rear window.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
The switch is located on
the overhead console.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf. It
only works while the ignition is on or while the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3-24.
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release
the switch again.
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may
get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in
your vehicle.
3-18
9
(Off): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off, you
can open the trunk using either the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
— (On): Press this side of the button to turn the lockout
feature on. When the lockout feature is turned on, the
trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-4 and Trunk on page 3-12 for additional
information.
To arm the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch with
the door open or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The security light will flash.
3. Close all the doors. The security light will come on
and stay on for approximately 30 seconds.
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a
RKE transmitter the horn will sound and the lamps will
flash for about 30 seconds.
3-19
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It
arms only if you use a power door lock with the door
open or the RKE transmitter.
To avoid arming the alarm by accident:
• Lock the vehicle with the door key or the manual
door lock.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the
RKE transmitter system. Pressing the unlock button
on the RKE transmitter, or unlocking a door with
the key disarms the content theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the
alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
system, or by starting the car with a valid key.
Changes or modifications made to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use the theft system.
3-20
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the
RKE system and close the door. Wait 30 seconds
until the security lamp goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the hazard lights will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6-101. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on when trying to start the vehicle, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 6-101. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
3-21
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the original key to LOCK/OFF.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-22
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 5-26 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different positions:
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand, see your
dealer/retailer.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and transmission and steering column.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off
center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from
right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.
In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. To
use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
3-23
C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns to
after the vehicle is started. This position displays
some of the warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER DOOR OPEN
when the driver door is opened if the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the
ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67
for more information.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
•
•
•
•
Audio System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Power Windows
Sunroof (if equipped)
3-24
Power to these accessories will work up to 10 minutes
or until the driver’s door is opened. For an additional
10 minutes of power, close all the doors and turn the key
to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will slow down as
the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
3-25
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver side
of the engine, behind the transmission dipstick/fluid
fill location and next to the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
3-26
Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located either on the steering column or on the console
between the seats.
{ WARNING:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3-31. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5-26.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply the regular brakes before you can shift from
P (Park) while the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If
you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)
as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 3-32.
3-27
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also use this gear to rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the
transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow on page 5-17 for additional information.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
3-28
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for the vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 5-10.
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
D (Drive) can be used for towing. You may want to shift
the transmission to 3 (Third) or, if necessary, to a
lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
See Towing a Trailer on page 5-26 for more information.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more than
D (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less
shifting between gears and when going down a
steep hill.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use
2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use the brakes off and on.
Performance Shifting
Notice: Do not shift into 2 (Second) unless you are
going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage the engine and/or transmission.
If the vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in
driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving
maneuver, the vehicle’s transmission automatically shifts
to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle
performance. The vehicle will automatically return to
normal operation when you return to normal driving
patterns.
3-29
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver door.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light will come on and
stay on until the parking brake is released. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 4-52 for more
information.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down.
When you lift your foot off the parking brake pedal,
the pedal will follow your foot to the released position.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down, then push the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.
3-30
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5-26.
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If
you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 5-26.
Steering Column Shift Lever
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as
it will go.
3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3-30 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Console Shift Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle
and then to the left.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-30
for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
3-31
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting
Into Park” in this section.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in P (Park)
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking Brake
on page 3-30 for more information.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
Torque Lock
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of a
an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting
the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and
then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park).
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6-36.
3-32
Console Shift
If the console shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)
1. Apply the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. See Ignition Positions on page 3-23 for
more information.
3. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Move the column shift to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking Over Things That Burn
4. Then, shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Column Shift
If the column shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)
1. Apply the regular brakes.
{ WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position. See Ignition Positions
on page 3-23 for more information.
3-33
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to
CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion
or damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
WARNING:
3-34
(Continued)
(Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake after you move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3-31.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5-26.
3-35
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror with a compass display. Automatic dimming
reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light
illuminates each time the vehicle is started.
O (On/Off): Press and hold O for about three
seconds to turn the dimming feature and compass
display on or off.
AUTO 3 (Vehicles with Intellibeam™): Press and
hold for approximately three seconds to turn the
compass display on or off. See Exterior Lamps on
page 4-25 for more information.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Compass
Compass Operation
Press O or AUTO 3 , depending on the vehicle, to
turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, after
a few seconds, the mirror will display the compass
heading. The compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven.
Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds, the display does not show the
correct direction, (for example, N for North), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Interference can be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a
similar magnetic item.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding O or AUTO 3 ,
depending on the vehicle, until a C is shown in
the compass display.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
3-36
Compass Variance
The compass is set to zone eight. If you do not live in
zone eight or drive out of the area, the compass
variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
3. Once the zone number displays, press O or
AUTO 3 repeatedly until the correct zone number
displays. Stop pressing the button and the mirror
will return to normal operation. If C appears in
the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.
2. Press and hold O or AUTO
number displays.
3 until a zone
Press the selector switch (A) or (B) to choose either the
left or right outside mirror. Then press the control pad
to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3-37
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to unfold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors toward the vehicle.
Turn Signal Indicator (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that
is built into the mirror. The turn signal lamp flashes
with the use of the vehicle’s turn signal and hazard
flashers.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror
controls to reset them to their normal position. A
noise may be heard during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual
folding operation.
3-38
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on
the automatic dimming rearview mirror.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3-43
for more information.
Park Tilt Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it is
capable of performing the park tilt mirror feature. This
feature allows the driver and passenger side mirror to tilt
to a factory programmed position when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). This feature may be useful in allowing you
to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and
either a five-second delay has occurred, or the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver and passenger
side mirror will return to its original position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80 for more information.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit
a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Climate Control System on page 4-36 for more
information.
3-39
Object Detection Systems
{ WARNING:
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) system, it operates at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5mph), and assists the driver with parking
and avoiding objects. It can determine how close
objects are to the front bumper, up to 1.2 m (4 ft.) in
front of the vehicle and the rear bumper, up to
2.5 m (8 ft.) behind the vehicle. The distance sensors
are located on the front and rear bumper.
3-40
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park Assist
(UFRPA) system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before moving
forward and while backing; vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with UFRPA, always
check in front of the vehicle before moving forward
and behind the vehicle before backing up. While
moving forward and backing, be sure to look for
objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
How the System Works
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The system does not work at a
forward or reverse speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
To be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.)
off the ground and below hood or trunk level. Objects
must also be within 1.2 m (4 ft.) in front of the
vehicle and 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the rear bumper. This
distance may be less during warmer or humid weather.
Front Parking Assist
Display
Rear Parking Assist
Display
The front display is located on top of the instrument
panel to the right of the driver. The front display will have
either three or six lights to provide distance and
system information. With Adaptive Cruise control (ACC),
it will have three lights along with the ACC lights.
Without ACC, it will have six lights. High-toned beeps
from the front speakers are for objects detected near the
front bumper.
The rear display is located near the rear window and
can be seen by looking over your right shoulder.
The rear display uses three color-coded lights to provide
distance and system information. Low-toned beeps
from the rear speakers are for the rear bumper.
When backing up, if objects are detected at the
same time near both the front and rear bumpers, both
color-coded light displays will notify you of objects close
to each bumper. If there are objects detected near
both bumpers, the beeps will only be sounded to notify
that objects are close to the rear bumper. However,
if while the vehicle is backing up and an object comes
within 0.3 m (1 ft.) of the front bumper, and at the same
time there is another object further than 0.3 m (1 ft.)
from the rear bumper, then the beeps will only be
sounded to notify you of the closer object that is near
the front bumper.
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 4-62 for more information.
3-41
Moving Forward
Backing
When the vehicle is started, the front display will briefly
illuminate to let you know the system is working.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) comes on
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). The rear display will then briefly illuminate
to let you know the system is working.
The following describes what will occur with the front
display as you get closer to a object detected in the front
of the vehicle:
Description
amber/amber lights
ACC — one amber light
four amber lights
ACC — two amber lights
four amber/ two red lights
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light
four amber/ two red lights
flashing and beep for
five seconds
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light
flashing and beep for
five seconds
3-42
Metric
English
1.2 m
4 ft
1.0 m
40 in
0.6 m
23 in
0.3 m
1 ft
The following describes what will occur with the rear
display as you get closer to an object detected in
the rear of your vehicle:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
and continuous beeping
for five seconds
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and continuous
beeping for five seconds
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
English
8 ft.
40 in.
0.6 m
23 in.
0.3 m
1 ft.
The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62 for more
information.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
• The driver disables the system.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-95.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in
the rear display. Once the attached object is
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at
least 25 km/h (15 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. Read this entire section before using the system.
{ WARNING:
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
• Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.
• Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or
death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, amber SBZA displays will light up in the side
mirrors. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change
lanes. Before making a lane change, always check
the SBZA display, check the outside and rearview
mirrors, look over your shoulder for vehicles and
hazards, and use the turn signal.
3-43
How the System Works
Left Side Mirror Display
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m (11 ft).
This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5 m (16 ft). The height of the zone is
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off
the ground.
The SBZA detection zones do not change if the vehicle
is towing a trailer. So be extra careful when changing
lanes while towing a trailer.
3-44
Right Side Mirror
Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. While driving forward, the left or right side
mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected in
that blind zone. If you activate a turn signal and a vehicle
has been detected on the same side, the SBZA display
will flash to give you extra warning not to change lanes.
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays may
come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in or
drops back into the detection zone.
SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4-61 for more information. If the SBZA
is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will
not light up during normal driving.
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. The
system does not need to be serviced due to an
occasional missed alert. The number of missed alerts
will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.
If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is
on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails,
signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects. This is
normal system operation, the vehicle does not need
service.
SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners
of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-95. If the DIC
still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper, see
your dealer/retailer.
The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached
to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending out
to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn
SBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the
conditions for normal system operation are not met.
Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met, you
should not rely upon SBZA while driving.
SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may appear in the DIC:
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor may be blocked
by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even heavy
rainstorms. This message may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not
need service. For cleaning, see Washing Your
Vehicle on page 6-95.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving, the
system needs service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
3-45
FCC Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
FCC information.
{ WARNING:
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system does
not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help you
stay in your driving lane. The LDW system may not:
• Provide you with enough time to avoid a lane
change collision.
• Be loud enough for you to hear the warning
beeps.
• Work properly under bad weather conditions or
if the windshield is not kept clean.
• Detect lane markings and will not detect road
edges.
• Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a lane
marking if the system does not detect the
lane marking.
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak
(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 m.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or
TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to
this equipment. Such modifications could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
The vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system. Read this entire section before using the
system.
WARNING:
3-46
(Continued)
How the System Works
WARNING:
(Continued)
LDW will indicate the system is working whenever
it detects either the left or right lane marking. So if
you depart on the side of the lane that LDW is not
detecting, LDW will not warn you.
If you do not carefully maintain your vehicle
position within the lane, vehicle damage, injury, or
death could occur. Even with LDW, always keep
your attention on the road and maintain proper
vehicle position within the lane. Always keep the
windshield clean and do not use LDW in bad
weather conditions.
When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, the
LDW symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.
LDW will not warn you if the turn signal is on or if
you make a sharp maneuver. Before making a lane
change, check the vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and start the
turn signal before changing lanes.
LDW uses a camera located between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield to detect the lane
markings.
@
(Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on and
off, press the LDW control, located by the exterior
headlamp control. An indicator on the control will light to
indicate that LDW is on.
When the vehicle is started, the LDW symbol, located in
the instrument panel cluster, will briefly come on to
indicate that the light is operational.
LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or
greater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at these
speeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the system
detects a left or right lane marking.
3-47
This symbol will change to amber and flash and three
beeps will sound if you cross a detected lane marking
without using the turn signal.
If the LDW symbol does not appear, LDW is not
currently operating and will not warn you.
To change the volume of the warning chime, see Chime
Volume under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4-80
for more information.
When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
The LDW symbol will not appear when the system is
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if
the view of the camera on the windshield is blocked
with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is
damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such as while
driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions. This is normal
operation, the vehicle does not need service. For
cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-95.
LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar marks,
shadows, cracks in the road, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system operation, the
vehicle does not need service.
3-48
LDW Error Message
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This
message may appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is
not working properly. If this message remains on
after continued driving, the system needs service.
Take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message may appear in the DIC if LDW does not
activate due to a temporary condition.
Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three remote
control transmitters used to activate devices such as
garage door openers, security systems, and home
automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
3-49
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
3-50
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
3-51
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-52
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
3-53
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button may need to be
held for up to 55 seconds.
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
3-54
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-6.
Storage Areas
Front Storage Area
Glove Box
To access the front storage area, push down and then
release. Push up and forward to remove.
Lift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key to
lock and unlock the glove box.
Center Console Storage
Cupholders
There are cupholders located in the full floor console, or
in the front of the center seat console. Cupholders
are also located in the rear armrest. Slide the cover back
to access the full floor console cupholder. Fold open
the front of the console to access the center seat
console cupholder.
If the vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage
areas. Lift the left lever located in the front of the
armrest lid to access the upper storage tray. Lift the
right lever to access the lower storage area. If the
vehicle has a center seat console it will have two storage
areas. Press the button located on the front of the
armrest and lift the armrest cover to access the upper
storage area. Pull the strap located behind the cup
holder to access the lower storage area.
3-55
Center Flex Storage Unit
Rear Seat Armrest
This vehicle may have a center flex storage unit that
includes a front center seat with a lap belt and an
underseat storage compartment. The center seatback
can also be used as an armrest. Cupholders are
also located at the front edge of the storage unit and
can be accessed by folding the compartment forward.
This vehicle has a rear seat armrest with cupholders.
Pull the tab on the armrest forward, to access it.
Pull the handle rearward to open a storage compartment
and access the accessory power outlet. Pull out to
remove.
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be
stored in the underseat storage compartment.
Floor Mats
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two hooks.
Remove the floor mat by pulling up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect it from the hooks.
Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the openings in the
floor mat over the hooks and push it down into place.
Properly place the driver’s side floor mat on the floor so
that it does not block the movement of the accelerator
pedal.
3-56
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located on
the overhead console.
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver side
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than to the express-open position,
press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the
movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, it
will open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold
the passenger side switch forward to vent the sunroof.
The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the
full vent position. The sunshade must be opened
manually.
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3-24.
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must
be closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger side sunroof switch rearward.
3-57
✍ NOTES
3-58
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................4-3
Horn .............................................................4-3
Tilt Wheel .....................................................4-3
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
Column ......................................................4-4
Heated Steering Wheel ...................................4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................4-5
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................4-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................4-6
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System ................4-6
Flash-to-Pass ...............................................4-10
Windshield Wipers ........................................4-10
Rainsense™ II Wipers ....................................4-10
Windshield Washer .......................................4-11
Cruise Control ..............................................4-12
Adaptive Cruise Control .................................4-15
Exterior Lamps .............................................4-25
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................4-29
Headlamps on Reminder ................................4-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................4-29
Fog Lamps ..................................................4-30
Cornering Lamps ..........................................4-30
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................4-30
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................4-31
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................4-31
Entry Lighting ...............................................4-31
Parade Dimming ...........................................4-31
Reading Lamps ............................................4-32
Footwell Lamps ............................................4-32
Battery Load Management .............................4-32
Electric Power Management ...........................4-33
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................4-33
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................4-34
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................4-34
Ashtray(s) ....................................................4-35
Analog Clock ...............................................4-35
Climate Controls ............................................4-36
Dual Climate Control System ..........................4-36
Outlet Adjustment .........................................4-41
Rear Climate Control System .........................4-42
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................4-44
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............4-46
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................4-47
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................4-48
Tachometer .................................................4-48
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................4-49
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................4-50
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................4-51
4-1
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Charging System Light ..................................4-52
Brake System Warning Light ..........................4-52
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....4-53
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......4-54
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light .............................4-54
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light ..............4-55
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......4-55
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................4-56
Tire Pressure Light .......................................4-56
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................4-57
Oil Pressure Light .........................................4-59
Security Light ...............................................4-60
Fog Lamp Light ............................................4-60
Lights On Reminder ......................................4-60
Cruise Control Light ......................................4-60
Highbeam On Light .......................................4-61
Fuel Gage ...................................................4-61
4-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................4-61
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................4-62
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................4-67
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................4-80
Audio System(s) .............................................4-88
Setting the Clock ..........................................4-89
Radio(s) (MP3) .............................................4-92
Using an MP3 ............................................4-102
XM Radio Messages ...................................4-107
Navigation/Radio System ..............................4-108
Bluetooth® .................................................4-108
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................4-119
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................4-119
Radio Reception .........................................4-120
Backglass Antenna ......................................4-121
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............4-121
Instrument Panel Overview
Tilt Wheel
Hazard Warning Flashers
This feature allows the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
The adjustment lever is
located on the left side of
the steering column.
| again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down.
2. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
If the vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt and
telescope wheel control
is located on the outboard
side of the steering
column.
Heated Steering Wheel
The vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this feature
is located on the steering
wheel.
Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light
on the button displays while the feature is turned on.
Heating will begin in about three minutes.
Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel
up or down.
Press the control forward or rearward and the steering
wheel moves toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80 and Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel on page 2-6.
4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
2 3:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N:
Windshield Wipers
L:
Windshield Washer
Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
For vehicles with the side blind zone alert system, an
arrow in the outside mirror flashes when the turn signal
is used. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3-43 for more information.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. If the lever is briefly pressed and
released, the turn signal will flash three times.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6-101.
4-5
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime sounds and
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display TURN
SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile as a reminder to
turn it off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-67.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward to change the headlamps from low
beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release it to
change from high beam to low.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on,
indicating high-beam
usage.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
4-6
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle
too quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a
visual alert with no audible alert if you are following
another vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol
is located on top of the instrument panel to the right
of the driver. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,
within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The FCA control is located
on the steering wheel.
{ WARNING:
FCA is only a warning system and does not apply
the brakes. When you are approaching a vehicle
or object too rapidly or when you are following a
vehicle too closely that is ahead of you, FCA may
not provide you with enough time to avoid a
collision. FCA is not designed to warn the driver of
pedestrians or animals. Your complete attention is
always required while driving and you should be
ready to take action and apply the brakes. For
more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise
Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4-15.
4-7
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.
FCA is disabled when the indicator light is amber.
Alerting the Driver
The FCA alert symbol will
flash and a warning beep
will sound when driver
action may be required.
{ WARNING:
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect a
•
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA on
winding roads.
When weather limits visibility, such as in fog,
rain, or snow, FCA performance is limited.
There may not be enough warning distance to
the vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on
FCA in low visibility conditions.
The alert symbol will flash when:
• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle too
quickly.
• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of you
much too closely.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2 for more information.
{ WARNING:
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another Adaptive
Cruise Control button, you might go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could be startled
and even lose control. Be careful not to press
adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use
cruise control.
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in
your driving lane.
4-8
Unnecessary Alerts
{ WARNING:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle
ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a collision
under these conditions. Do not use FCA when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” under
Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4-15.
{ WARNING:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects
ahead of you. You could crash into an object
ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects.
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does not
need service.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-67.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15.
4-9
Flash-to-Pass
6
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
1
The flash-to-pass feature will only work with the
headlamps on. It does not work with Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
9 (Off):
(Low Speed): Slow wipes.
(High Speed): Fast wipes.
Turns the wipers off.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced.
If the headlamps are on low beam, pulling the turn signal
towards you will flash the high beams.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
The vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. After the
windshield wipers have completed eight wipe cycles
within four minutes, the headlamps automatically
turn on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4-29
for more information.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol on it to control the
windshield wipers.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
Windshield Wipers
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, hold it on mist
until the wipers start, then release. The wipers stop after
one wipe. Several wipes, hold the band longer.
6 (Delay):
Use to set the delay time between wipe
cycles. The wiper speed can be set for a long or short
delay between wipes. The closer the band is set to
the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
4-10
If the vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior of the windshield beside
the rearview mirror and is used to automatically operate
the wipers. This system operates by monitoring the
amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending
on the driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In
light rain or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy
rain or snow, wipes will occur more frequently.
The system operates in the delay mode. If the system is
left on for long periods of time, occasional wipes may
occur without any moisture on the windshield. This
is normal and indicates that the Rainsense™ system
is active.
Windshield Washer
{ WARNING:
™
The Rainsense system is activated by turning the
wiper control band to one of the five sensitivity levels
within the delay area. The position closest to off is
the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more
rain or snow to collect on the windshield between
wipes. Turning the wiper band away from you to higher
sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the
system and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity
setting, level five is closest to low. A single wipe will
occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher
sensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity level has
been increased.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
J
(Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle,
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to
spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers will
clear the windshield and either stop or return to
the preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and
hold the paddle.
The MIST and wash cycle operates as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense™ function. The system
can be overridden at any time by manually changing the
wiper control to low or high speed.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the rain
sensor.
4-11
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). A cruise control
light appears in the instrument panel cluster when the
cruise control is on.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
4-12
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control automatically turns off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5-6. When road
conditions let you safely use it again, the cruise control
can be turned back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{ WARNING:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster comes
on after the cruise control has been set to the desired
speed.
1. Press
I.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET– button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
I
(On): Turns on the cruise control system.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
SET– (Set): Press to set the speed.
[
(Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control.
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied. This shuts off the
cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES (resume/accelerate)
button to return to the desired preset speed. The
cruise light displays again.
The vehicle returns to and stays at the preset speed. If
you press and hold the +RES button, the vehicle speed
increases until the button is released or the brake is
applied. Do not hold in the +RES button, if you do not
want the vehicle speed to increase.
4-13
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET– button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
now cruises at the higher speed.
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release
the button. To increase the vehicle speed in very
small amounts, briefly press the +RES button
and then release it. Each time this is done, the
vehicle accelerates approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
The accelerate feature only works after the cruise
control speed is set by pressing the SET– button.
4-14
• Press the SET– button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– button briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle slows down approximately
1.6 km/h (1 mph).
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the previous cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear
ends cruise control. If you need to apply the brake
or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you might not want to attempt to use the
cruise control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Adaptive Cruise Control
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an enhancement to
traditional cruise control. It allows you to keep cruise
control engaged in moderate traffic conditions without
having to constantly reset your cruise control.
ACC uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in
your path, within a distance of 100 m (330 ft), and
operates at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). When it is
engaged by the driver, the system can apply limited
braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically to
maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle ahead.
Braking is limited to 2.45 m/sec2 (0.25 g’s) of
deceleration, which is comparable to moderate
4-15
application of the vehicle’s brakes. To disengage ACC,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking
or bring the vehicle to a complete stop. It will not
respond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians or
animals. When you are approaching a vehicle or
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action and
apply the brakes. For more information, see
Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
{ WARNING:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
•
•
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to
slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash
when you are driving in conditions where
vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of
you, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s
path. If you are driving in these conditions, do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning
beep and alert symbol may indicate that you
are driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used. See
“Alerting the Driver” in this section.
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause needless wheel spinning, and you
could lose control. Do not use cruise control
on slippery roads.
WARNING:
4-16
(Continued)
WARNING:
(Continued)
• When weather limits visibility, such as when in
fog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive Cruise
Control performance is limited. There may not
be enough distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the
steering wheel.
]
(On): Press to turn the system on.
+ Res (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to increase
the set speed when ACC is already active.
Set–: Press to set the speed or to decrease the set
speed when ACC is already active.
[
(Cancel): Press to cancel ACC.
+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press to
increase the distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press to
decrease the distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
ACC will not work if the master cylinder brake fluid level
is low.
The ACCs are located on the steering wheel.
4-17
Engaging ACC With the Set Button
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of the
instrument panel to the right of the driver. When the on
symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that ACC is active.
{ WARNING:
A message on the DIC will also display when ACC is
set. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67.
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch
on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not want
to. You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed your vehicle will travel if there is no vehicle
detected in its path.
To set ACC, do the following:
1. Press the
] button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the SET– button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if
it detects a vehicle ahead is too close or moving
slower than your vehicle.
4-18
If the vehicle is in ACC when the traction control
system begins to limit wheel spin, the ACC will
automatically disengage. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-6 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-5. When road conditions allow you to safely use
it again, the ACC can be turned back on.
Increasing Set Speed While Using ACC
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET– button and then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will
now cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the
desired set speed is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), then release the switch.
To increase the set speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to +RES. Each time
this is done, the set speed increases
by 1 km/h (1 mph).
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the
set speed.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using ACC
Press the SET– button until you reach the lower speed
desired, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
SET– button. Each time this is done, the set speed
decreases by 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the ACC is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied. This will turn off the ACC. But it
does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more, press the +RES button. ACC will be engaged
with the previously chosen set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow
distance (gap) you select.
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel
to adjust the follow distance.
Press the plus button to increase the distance or the
minus button to decrease the distance. The first button
press shows the current follow distance setting on
the DIC. The current follow distance setting will
be maintained until it is changed.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The
follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary
based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed
the further back your vehicle will follow. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when selecting the follow
distance. The range of selectable distances may not
be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
If you prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than
ACC allows, disengage the system and drive manually.
4-19
Alerting the Driver
The ACC alert symbol is
located on the display at
the top of the instrument
panel to the right of
the driver.
The alert symbol flashes and a warning beep sounds
when driver action may be required. If ACC is engaged,
the alert symbol will flash when:
• ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because you
are approaching a vehicle too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about 32 km/h
(20 mph).
{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases,
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be ready
to take action and apply the brakes yourself. See
Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
is located on the top of the
instrument panel to the
right of the driver.
• A temporary condition prohibits ACC from operating.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 for
more information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 for more
information.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
4-20
The vehicle ahead symbol only appears when a vehicle
is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
ACC will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.
{ WARNING:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle
ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” later in
this section.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when approaching stationary or
slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
{ WARNING:
ACC automatically slows your vehicle down when
approaching a slower moving vehicle. It then adjusts
your vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at
the selected follow distance. Your vehicle speed
increases or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of
you, but will not exceed the set speed. It may apply
limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active,
your brake lights will come on. Braking may feel
or sound different than if you were applying the brakes
yourself. This is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may accelerate
toward objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes
lanes. Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes.
4-21
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your vehicle speed falls below 32 km/h (20 mph) while
following a vehicle ahead, ACC will begin to disengage.
The Driver Alert symbol will flash and the warning
beep will sound. The driver must take action since
ACC will not slow the vehicle to a stop.
Passing a Vehicle/ACC Override
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the accelerator
pedal. While you are doing this, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes. A message will appear
on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-67. Once you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, ACC will return to normal operation
and be able to apply the brakes, if needed.
{ WARNING:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do
not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal when
using Adaptive Cruise Control.
4-22
Curves in the Road
{ WARNING:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in
your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes
if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may
reduce your vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC
could lose track of the vehicle in your lane and
accelerate your vehicle. When this happens the Vehicle
Ahead symbol will not appear.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and
apply the brakes.
ACC may, occasionally, provide a driver alert and/or
braking that you consider unnecessary. It could respond
to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects
when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
4-23
Highway Exit Ramps
Using ACC on Hills and When Towing a
Trailer
{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set speed
while entering or on highway exit ramps. You
could be startled by this acceleration and even
lose control of the vehicle. Disengage Adaptive
Cruise Control before entering a highway exit
ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control while
entering or on exit ramps.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
How well ACC will work on hills and when towing a
trailer depends on your vehicle’s speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It
may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to
use the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, especially when towing a
trailer, you may want to brake to keep your speed
down. Applying the brake disengages the system. You
may choose not to use ACC on steep hills, especially
when towing a trailer.
Disengaging ACC
To turn off the system, apply the brake pedal, press the
cancel button, or press the ACC button.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, ACC will
not detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself.
4-24
Erasing Set Speed Memory
Exterior Lamps
Press the ACC button or turn the ignition off.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
Other Messages
There are three additional messages that may appear
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.
These messages will appear to indicate a problem with
the ACC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-67 for more information.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens. Remember, do not use ACC in icy conditions,
or when visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage
the ACC. If you are unable to do so, see your
dealer/retailer.
It controls the following systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O
(Off): Turns off the exterior lamps except for
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
4-25
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• IntelliBeam™
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Instrument Panel Lights
License Plate Lamps
Taillamps
Side Marker Lamps
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays on
while the parking lamps are on with the engine off
and the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the previously listed lamps. A warning chime sounds
if the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
#
(Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to
turn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 4-30.
4-26
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on the
rearview mirror, this system turns the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
The IntelliBeam system turns the high-beam headlamps
on when it is dark enough, there is no other traffic
present, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™
Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the inside
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam indicator on the
mirror turns on to indicate the system is on. Once the
system has been turned on, it remains on each time the
vehicle is started, but the IntelliBeam system must be
enabled.
To enable the IntelliBeam system, turn the exterior lamp
control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light
appears on the instrument panel cluster when the
high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light on
page 4-61.
Driving with IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam only activates the high-beams when driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h).
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam, until any of the
following situations occur:
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is
used. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
on page 4-6 and Flash-to-Pass on page 4-10.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam feature is disabled and the IntelliBeam
light in the mirror turns off until the high-beam stalk is
returned to the neutral position.
• If IntelliBeam was using low-beams prior to this
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam is disabled until the
control is turned back to the AUTO position.
• The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam might not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of
any of the following:
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow, and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist, or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of the
IntelliBeam light sensor.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze, or other obstructions.
action, the IntelliBeam feature is temporarily
disabled until the stalk is returned to the
neutral position.
4-27
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the
vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and
taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ at
the Rearview Mirror
A different sensitivity setting is available for
dealer/retailer diagnostics. This is done by pushing and
holding this button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam
indicator light flashes three times. If you accidentally
activate this, the vehicle’ s setting automatically is reset
when the ignition is turned off and then on again.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
in front of the inside
rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on the
inside rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (On/Off): Press this button on the inside
rearview mirror to disable the system. The IntelliBeam
indicator turns off and does not come back on until
the IntelliBeam button is pressed again.
When IntelliBeam has turned on the high-beams, pull or
push the high-beam stalk. This will disable IntelliBeam.
The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror turns off. To
turn IntelliBeam back on, press the IntelliBeam button
on the mirror.
4-28
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glass
cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
• The transmission is not in P (Park)
(United States only).
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on and have
completed eight wipe cycles within four minutes.
When the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the
wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off. The
wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if the windshield
wipers are turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the turn signal lamps come on
when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
• The light sensor is covered or not detecting light.
See “Sensors” under Dual Climate Control System
on page 4-36.
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as the
parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the
DRL are being used. The instrument panel will not be lit
up either.
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough
outside, the turn signal lamps turn off and normal
low-beam headlamp operation occurs.
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough
outside, the regular lamps go off, and the DRL
takes over. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.
Once you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if there is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness knob
is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 4-31.
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the
fog lamps were turned on instead, the DRL will still
deactivate.
4-29
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off
automatic lighting and shift the transmission into P (Park).
Placing the vehicle in P (Park) disables the DRL. The
DRL will stay off until the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or
fog lamps, if the vehicle has them.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamps button is on the exterior lamps control to
the left of the steering column.
#
(Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps button to
turn the fog lamps on or off. A light comes on in
the instrument panel cluster when the fog lamps are in
use. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4-47.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the
fog lamps to work.
The fog lamps will go off when the headlamps are
changed to high-beam.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
4-30
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with the
multifunction lever. They provide more light for
cornering.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the exterior lamp button has been left on, the exterior
lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF and a door has been opened.
This protects against draining the battery if the
headlamps or parking lamps are accidentally left on.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF
and any door is opened.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
D
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the
backlighting for the door switches and the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if the remote keyless
entry transmitter unlock button is pressed. If activated
due to the transmitter, the lighting remains active for
about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting system uses
the light sensor, it must be dark outside in order for the
courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy lamps turn off
approximately 25 seconds after the last door is closed.
They will dim to off if the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN, or immediately deactivate if the power locks
are activated.
(Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel
and footwell lights, if equipped.
The button for this control is located below the exterior
lamps control.
Push the button in and release to extend the button.
Turn the button clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights.
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when
any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle lamps
are located on the bottom of the front and rear door trim.
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp
and also opera lamps.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays and
backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in
the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature is
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise
to brighten lighting.
4-31
Reading Lamps
Battery Load Management
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened
and it is dark outside.
This feature monitors the vehicle’s electrical load and
determines when the battery is in a heavy discharge
condition. During times of high electrical loading,
the engine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute
(rpm) setting than normal to make sure the battery
charges. High electrical loads may occur when several
of the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, the climate control fan at
high speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.
Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Footwell Lamps
For vehicles with footwell lamps, they are located under
the instrument panel and at the rear of the front
seats. These lamps provide soft light to the front and
rear floor areas. They dim with the instrument panel
cluster lights.
Footwell lighting brightness can be adjusted with the
instrument panel brightness control located below
the exterior lamps control. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 4-31. The footwell lights will turn off
before the instrument panel lights are at their lowest
level of brightness.
4-32
If the battery continues to discharge, even with
the engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer
to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm
as they usually do and the climate control fan may cut
back to a lower speed. For more battery saving
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-67.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door or
trunk is opened, or the courtesy lamp switch is
turned on.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
4-33
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being
drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally
left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they
automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is
off. The lamps will not come back on again until
one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is
located inside the lower storage area. Some vehicles
may have an outlet on the right front lower part of
the driver’s seat and under the climate control system
next to the ashtray. See Center Console Storage
on page 3-55.
4-34
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat
area located on the door armrests next to the
ashtrays.
There may be a small cap that must be removed to
access the accessory power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s)
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Front Ashtray
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below
the climate control system. To open, push down and
then release the cover. To clean the ashtray, push the
lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the opposite
side of the ashtray’s lip to install.
Rear Ashtray
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To use
an ashtray, lift the lid.
Analog Clock
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with
any other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust
the clock:
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the
clock face.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before reaching the desired time.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge
located at the top of the ashtray.
4-35
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with
Rear Climate Control
Dual Climate Control System
4-36
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Fan Control
Display
Air Delivery Mode Control
Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls
Air Conditioning
Outside Air or AUX
Recirculation
PASS (Passenger Climate Control)
Rear Window Defogger
Automatic Operation
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is
selected on the fan control, the system adjusts the fan
speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when this
position is selected, the climate control fan speed
will lower.
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 21°C (68°F) and 26°C (78°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle until
warmer air is available. The system starts out
blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the
chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed to warm the interior depends on the outside
temperature and temperature of the vehicle.
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize in
order for the system to regulate automatically. Then
adjust the temperature as necessary to find your
comfort setting.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
After the vehicle is started, the display shows the interior
temperature settings and the outside temperature.
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode
control, the system automatically controls the air
conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will run
automatically even at cool outside temperatures in order
to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light is lit when
the system is operating automatically, even at near
freezing outside temperatures. Press # on the fan
control to turn off the A/C. For improved window clearing
performance in defog or defrost modes, the A/C
compressor runs automatically.
h
(AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO position
is selected on either the fan or mode control, the
system automatically controls the air inlet to supply
fresh outside air or recirculate the interior air to cool the
car faster. The light on the recirculation button will
come on when the system changes to recirculation.
Outside air can be forced by pressing h when
the light is lit. For vehicles without rear climate controls,
press : to force outside air. The next time AUTO
fan or mode is selected, the air inlet will reset back to
AUTO operation.
4-37
Manual Operation
9
(Off): Turns the entire climate control system off.
Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to the
floor. The airflow direction and temperature can be
adjusted, as indicated below.
If the temperature is adjusted while the system is off,
the display will light to show the current settings.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode operation.
F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
w x (Driver’s Temperature Controls):
*
w x (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):
Press
the up or down buttons next to the air delivery
mode control to manually increase or decrease the
temperature for the front passenger. If the passenger
climate control system is off, pressing one of these
buttons turns it on.
7
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turning this
control completely counterclockwise will turn on
the automatic fan operation. If the airflow seems low
when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the
passenger compartment air filter may need to be
replaced. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on
page 4-44.
W
Press the up
or down buttons next to the fan control to manually
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
4-38
(Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
(Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the side window outlets and the
windshield.
If recirculation is selected, it only stays on for three
minutes to reduce windshield fogging.
(Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air going to the side window outlets and
windshield. When selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the floor/defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
and side window outlets. When selected, the system
automatically turns off recirculation and runs the
air conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the
AUX button on the front climate control system so
that the light is not lit.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off and override the automatic
system. When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor
comes on automatically, as necessary. To avoid
window fogging on rainy and humid days at
temperatures above freezing, run the air conditioning.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water may drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on or off. An indicator light comes on to show it is
on. Air is pulled from outside the vehicle.
Pressing ? will cancel this mode.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light below the button
comes on to show that this mode is on. This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and
odors from entering the vehicle. This mode cannot be
selected while in the defog or defrost modes. If you try to
select the recirculation mode, the indicator light
flashes three times and turns off.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
AUX: For vehicles with a rear climate control system,
press to turn the rear climate control fan on for automatic
operation. After the AUX button is pressed, the indicator
light comes on. Press the button again to turn the
auxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate Control System on
page 4-42.
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to turn the
passenger climate control systems on or off. When
the passenger climate control system is on, the
passenger temperature setting is displayed. The
temperature selected by the front passenger also
controls the rear system air temperature unless the rear
seat passengers select their own comfort setting.
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the passenger
temperature setting off, the driver’s temperature
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
4-39
Rear Window Defogger
Sensors
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow
from the rear window as possible. The rear window
defogger will turn off approximately 20 minutes after the
button is pressed if the vehicle is moving at slower
vehicle speeds. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear
defogger may stay on continuously. Each additional
press will run the defogger for approximately 10 minutes.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will turn on to
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror
when the rear window defogger is on.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
4-40
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle of
the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located next to the steering
wheel that measures the
temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Outlet Adjustment
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located below
each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the
thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the airflow
or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
In order to prevent false temperature readings at
startup, the displayed temperature will not change until
the following occurs:
• Vehicle speed is above 16 km/h (10 mph) for
5 minutes.
• Vehicle speed is above 51 km/h (32 mph) for 2 and
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up or
down to change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
a half minutes.
4-41
Rear Climate Control System
For vehicles with a rear climate control system, the
rear seat passengers can adjust the direction of
the airflow, fan speed and temperature for the rear
seating area. This system also works with the main
climate control system in the vehicle.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press the AUX button located on the
front climate control panel to turn the rear climate
control system on or off. When turned on the rear
system operates in automatic mode and the temperature
settings selected for the front climate control panel
will also be selected for the rear passengers.
To adjust the rear climate control system, the rear
passenger can select a different temperature, mode or
fan speed. Whenever the rear passengers have
adjusted settings on the rear climate control system, the
AUX light is lit on the front climate control system.
When the front climate control system is turned off or in
defrost mode, the rear climate control system is
turned off. The rear system will turn back on once
another front mode is selected.
For more information on how to use the front climate
control system, see Dual Climate Control System
on page 4-36. For more information on the air outlets,
see Outlet Adjustment on page 4-41.
The rear climate control system is located on the back
of the center console.
A. Display
B. Fan Control
C. Temperature Control
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
4-42
Automatic Operation
Manual Operation
« A ª (Fan Control): Press until AUTO appears on
the display to place the system in automatic mode.
When automatic operation is active, the system
automatically controls the fan speed. If in auto fan
mode, pressing the up arrow button will cancel
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. If in auto mode, pressing the down arrow will turn
the rear climate control system off.
« A ª (Fan Control): Press to increase or decrease
the fan speed.
« N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press until
AUTO appears on the display to place the system
in automatic mode. When automatic operation is active,
the system controls the air delivery mode.
« b ª (Temperature Control): Press to increase or
decrease the temperature for the rear seat passengers.
Once the rear temperature setting is changed from
following the front temperature setting, it will no longer
follow changes to the front temperature setting until
the front climate control AUX button resets it.
« N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press these
buttons to change the air delivery mode. If in AUTO
air delivery mode, pressing the up arrow button
will cancel automatic operation and place the system in
manual mode.
Y
(Vent): Air is directed to the upper outlets.
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the upper outlets
and the floor outlets.
[
(Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.
4-43
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering the vehicle. The filter
may need to be changed periodically. For how often to
change the passenger compartment air filter, see
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Use a tool to remove the cover. If the vehicle has
tabs that allow the cover to be unlatched with your
fingers, a tool will not be needed for this step.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
4-44
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on
the inboard side of the air filter compartment to
carefully pry the pin out.
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the air
filter and the compartment wall on the outboard
side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin
holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the
air filter and any loose debris that may be inside the
air filter compartment.
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear a
click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the
cover into place.
4-45
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
4-46
Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to indicate a problem
with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
4-47
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer shows the speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4-62 for more information.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. The vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. Trip A and Trip B
can be set on the odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62 for more
information.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one is set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
4-48
Tachometer
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Safety Belt Reminders
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. The passenger
safety belt light, located on the instrument panel, comes
on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes
for several more.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
4-49
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2-58.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
4-50
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67
for more information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-67 for
important safety information. The overhead console has
a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-50
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-51
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
4-52
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the engine is turned
on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The
light will stay on if the parking brake does not release
fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully.The pedal may be harder to push, or
the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-24.
{ WARNING:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 4-52.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-53
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This warning light comes
on briefly while starting
the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a
problem with the traction control system and the
vehicle needs service. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5-6 for more information.
4-54
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-5 for more
information.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Light
For vehicles with the lane
departure warning system,
this light briefly comes
on green, while starting the
vehicle, to indicate that it
is working.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
comes on when the
engine is very hot.
This light also comes on briefly when the vehicle is
started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light will then go off.
This light also comes on green if the system detects a
left or right lane marking. It flashes, changes to
amber and three beeps sound if a detected lane marking
is crossed without using a turn signal. For more
information, see the Index in the Navigation Manual.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on
could cause the vehicle to overheat, see Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6-29.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-27 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 for more
information.
4-55
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system, this
light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It
provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if the
cooling system is operating properly. If the gage
pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolant
is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning
light comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 6-27
for more information.
4-56
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4-61 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54 for
more information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6-58 for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It
ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6-3.
4-57
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop
the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the
key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If
the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6-8. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
4-58
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6-5.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might
have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This can take several days of routine driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle still does not
pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
4-59
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3-19.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
See Exterior Lamps on page 4-25 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4-12 and Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15 for more information.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4-30 for more information.
4-60
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears in the Driver Information Center and
a single chime sounds. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-67 for more information.
Here are a few situations that may occur with the fuel
gage. All of these situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4-6
for more information.
• The gage may change when the vehicle is turning,
Fuel Gage
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
engine is on.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
stops quickly or accelerates quickly.
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display warning/status messages. All
messages will appear in the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
4-61
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system
information and the warning/status messages. The
bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer on
the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display also
shows a digital speedometer on the right side.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4-80 for more information on the
customization features.
DIC Operation and Displays
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
4-62
y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items
can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). Both odometers can be
used at the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing and holding the
set/reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining kilometers (km) or miles (mi) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
Once the range drops below an estimated 64 km
(40 miles) remaining, the display will show FUEL
RANGE LOW.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67
for more information.
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
This display shows the approximate average liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).
This number is calculated based on the number
of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this
display was reset. To reset this display, press the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)
This display shows the current fuel economy in either
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,
this display cannot be reset.
FUEL USED
This display shows the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the last reset of this
display. To reset this display, press the set/reset button.
The display will return to zero.
4-63
TIMER ON/OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display. For
example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE
13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will show
LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show
HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal. See Charging System Light on
page 4-52 for more information.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and
display the end timing value.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button
after the timer has been stopped. The display will return
to zero.
AVERAGE SPEED
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
4-64
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-67 and Electric Power
Management on page 4-33 for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Display Menu
Items
T (Vehicle Information): The following display menu
items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
OIL LIFE REMAINING
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life
remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You
should change the oil as soon as possible. In addition
to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 and Engine Oil on page 6-13.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not
to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine
oil life system, See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
The display will show 100% when the system is reset.
UNITS
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or
METRIC units.
PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows the
system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF.
If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you
choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The
UFRPA system automatically turns back on after each
vehicle start. When the UFRPA system is turned off and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC will
display the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a
reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67 and Ultrasonic
Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3-40
for more information.
4-65
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this display allows the system to be turned on or
off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the
system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system
will be turned off. When the SBZA system is turned
off, the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the
system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-67 and Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA) on page 3-43 for more information.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add
air to a specific tire will appear in the display. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-67 for more information.
4-66
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH (SPEED LIMIT:
XXX Km/h) or ADVISORY: XXX MPH
(ADVISORY: XXX Km/h)
This display will show the speed limit or the advised
speed as determined by the information on the map disc
in the navigation system. If there is no map disc in
the navigation system, this display will not be available.
The speed limit and speed advisory displays on the
DIC are for reference only. There may be segments of
road where speed data has not been captured or
times where incorrect speed data, or no speed data, will
be displayed by the DIC due to the navigation system
not correctly matching the vehicle’s position to the actual
road. Be aware of this and obey posted speed limits
wherever you drive.
SPEED ALERT
This display will allow you to customize the speed alert
warning. You can choose to have no warning display,
or to have it display at the limit, at 5 km/h (mph) over the
limit, or at 10 km/h (mph) over the limit. The DIC will
toggle between OFF, AT LIMIT, +5, +10 (Km/h or MPH).
Press the reset button to make your selection.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
Blank Display
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure
will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
This display shows no information.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
DIC Warnings and Messages
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the set/reset button.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
the problem.
ADVISORY XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the
vehicle is at or above the advised speed. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4-62.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 4-25 for
more information.
4-67
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 4-25 for
more information.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button
until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for your
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 6-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 for
more information.
4-68
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or ADD AIR
TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to
be checked. The low tire pressure warning light will
also come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4-56.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
label. See Tires on page 6-46, Loading the Vehicle
on page 5-18, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54. You can receive more than one tire pressure
message at a time. To read the other messages that
may have been sent at the same time, press the
set/reset button. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62.
CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) system are disabled because the radar is blocked
and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may also
activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean
the system, see “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays whenever the cruise control is
set. See Cruise Control on page 4-12 and Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15 for more information.
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), after
a few seconds, this message clears and the message
“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.
See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.
ENGINE HOT – A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 4-56.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
4-69
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 6-27 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 4-55.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 6-29 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6-27
for more information.
4-70
This message displays when the engine has overheated.
Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle
over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe
engine damage. See Engine Overheating on page 6-27
and Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 6-29. A chime also sounds when this message
is displayed.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is being
reduced to protect the engine from damage. There
could be several malfunctions that might cause
this message. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
FOLLOWING GAP
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single
chime sounds when this message is displayed. See
Filling the Tank on page 6-8.
HOOD OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.
This symbol appears with this message.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message displays to show the follow distance that
has been set. There are six follow distances to choose
from. Each follow distance is shown on the DIC by
displaying from one to six bars between two car
symbols. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4-15 for
more information.
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely. See Hood Release on page 6-11.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
4-71
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDAL
APPLIED
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display if the LDW system
does not activate due to a temporary condition.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 3-46 for
more information.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing the
accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic
braking. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4-15 for
more information.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 6-13 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
Light on page 4-59.
A multiple chime sounds when this message is displayed.
See Engine Oil on page 6-13 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
4-72
PARKING ASSIST OFF
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park), this message displays to remind
the driver that the UFRPA system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the
UFRPA system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST”
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62. See
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
on page 3-40 for more information.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. If this message appears when you attempt to
activate the system, continue driving for several minutes
and then try activating the system again. See Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4-15 for more information.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3-4 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4-62 for more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3-4.
4-73
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. The charging
system light also displays on the instrument panel
cluster. See Charging System Light on page 4-52 for
more information. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-50 for more information.
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays when the air delivery mode door
or the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning
and heating systems are no longer working. Have
the climate control system serviced by your
dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
4-74
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and the
antilock brake system warning light may also be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 4-52 and Antilock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4-53 for more
information. If this happens, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the brake system needs service. See your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes
on page 6-32 for more information.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
system. See Steering on page 5-8.
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system, this message may display to indicate
that the LDW system is not working properly. If
this message remains on after continued driving, the
system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 3-46 for
more information.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message displays
if there is a problem with the UFRPA system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Front
and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3-40 for
more information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
This message displays if a problem is detected with the
speed variable assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) system are disabled and need service. See
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs service. See your
dealer/retailer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 3-43 for more information.
4-75
SERVICE STABILITRAK
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 5-5.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak system.
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back
on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the magnetic ride
control or automatic leveling control system is not
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the system which means
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you
may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
4-76
before turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+
Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 3-21 for more
information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4-56. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-58 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the TPMS, see your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message
is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for
service. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-6
for more information.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SET SPD (Speed)
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message displays whenever the cruise control is
set. First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”
message appears. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE
SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message clears and the
message “SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the
DIC. See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” earlier in
this section and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4-15
for more information.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA) on page 3-43 and DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4-62 for more information.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This
message may also display during heavy rain or due to
road spray. It may also come on when driving in
isolated areas with no guardrails, trees, or road signs
and light traffic. Your vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-95. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3-43 for more information.
SPEED LIMIT XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the
vehicle is at or above the speed limit. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 4-62 for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when your vehicle speed
is limited to 128 km/h (80 mph) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
4-77
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3-19 for more information.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message may display
and the Traction Control System and StabiliTrak Warning
Light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 km/h (19 mph) for
30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is not functional until
the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-5 for more information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears with
this message.
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-62, Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 6-57, and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-54 for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5-6 for more information.
4-78
TRACTION CONTROL ON
TRUNK OPEN
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-6 for more information.
This symbol appears with
this message.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime
sounds when this message is displayed.
4-79
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This symbol appears with
this message.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This message displays when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-31 for more information.
DIC Vehicle Customization
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
Feature Settings Menu Items
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
4-80
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 3-10 for more
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-81
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 3-10 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3-4 for
more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-82
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a
door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-83
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay
on for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-84
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 3-4 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 3-39 for more information.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on
page 2-6 for more information.
4-85
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up and forward when
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel on page 2-6 and “EASY EXIT RECALL”
earlier for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY: The driver’s seat will recall.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat and steering column will stay in the original
exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
SEAT/TELESCOPE: The driver’s seat and the steering
column telescope feature will recall.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
TILT/TELESCOPE: The steering wheel tilt and steering
column telescope features will recall.
4-86
TELESCOPE ONLY: The steering column telescope
feature will recall.
SEAT/TILT: The driver’s seat and the steering wheel tilt
feature will recall.
ALL (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,
if your vehicle has this option.
See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 4-62 for more information on
matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
on page 2-6 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 3-7 for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. The steering column will
also move on vehicles with the power tilt and telescopic
steering feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column on page 4-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-87
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
4-88
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3-24 for more information.
Setting the Clock
Radio with a Single CD or a Six-Disc
CD Player
The vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If
you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable
the radio clock display.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio
Clock
For the Single CD Player
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting
menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings are removed, and
ON displays as a current status indicating that the
clock display can be turned on, if desired.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio clock
using the procedure below to synchronize both clocks.
4-89
For a Six-Disc CD Player
Setting the Time and Date
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
For the Single CD Player
1. Turn the radio on.
H is displayed
Press the pushbutton located under H until the
2. Press the MENU button until
3.
clock and date settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and
date settings appear.
5. Press the pushbutton located under the
currently displayed status of either ON or OFF.
The ON display indicates the radio clock display is
disabled and the OFF display indicates the radio
clock display is enabled. Press this pushbutton
to toggle the radio clock display on or off.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen
displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The
menus for clock and date settings are removed, and
ON displays as a current status indicating that the
clock display can be turned on, if desired.
4-90
This type of radio has a H button for setting the time
and date. To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or
date, is to press the right SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can also
turn the a knob, located on the upper right
side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the
selected setting.
For a Six-Disc CD Player
This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the
time and date. To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
H option is displayed.
Press the pushbutton located under H and the
2. Press the MENU button until
3.
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
day, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or
date, is to press the right SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
Changing the Time and Date Default
Setting
For the Single CD Player
To change the time and date default setting:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing
the H button.
2. Once the clock and date settings display along with
the forward arrow tab, press the pushbutton located
under the forward arrow tab until the time 12H
and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day,
and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the H button again to apply
the selected default, or let the screen time out.
SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can also
turn the a knob, located on the upper right
side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the
selected setting.
4-91
For the Six-Disc CD Player
Radio(s) (MP3)
To change the time and date default setting:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing
the MENU button.
2. Once H displays, press the pushbutton located
under H until the time and date settings display
along with a forward arrow.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the time 12H and 24H, and the
date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
4-92
In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
AudioPilot®: If the vehicle has the Bose® audio
system, it has AudioPilot noise compensation
technology.
Playing the Radio
To use AudioPilot:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
O
(Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the AUTO
VOLUM tab on the radio display.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume to
compensate for road and wind noise while driving. That
way, the volume level should sound about the same
while driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature on
or off.
When turned ON, AudioPilot continuously adjusts the
audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise, so that the music always sounds the
same at the set volume level.
The feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through the vehicle’s
audio system. At high volume settings there might
be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For more
information on AudioPilot, visit bose.com/audiopilot.
4-93
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.
The selection displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
a
(Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4
(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A
choice of additional information such as: Channel, Song,
Artist, CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing
the information button to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the
tabs and the information about that tab displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4-94
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the radio favorites page button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a
favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the a knob to
adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until
the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency
is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified radio,
perform the following steps to setup the equalization
settings:
1. Press the
displays.
a knob until the equalization label
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization
label to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY (country),
TALK, JAZZ, and CLAS (classical), to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.
4-95
For the Bose amplified radio, perform the following
steps to setup the equalization settings:
1. Press the
a knob until the DSP label displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label
to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and Surround,
to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.
To select Surround, press either the fourth or
fifth pushbutton located under the displayed
Surround until Centerpoint displays.
To return to the manual mode, press the tune knob.
Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start to manually
adjust the settings by turning the a knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the a knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the a knob to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV
buttons until the desired levels are obtained.
4-96
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
This feature is used to provide a choice of four different
listening experiences. DSP can be used while listening
to the audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode,
press the a knob until the DSP control label displays.
Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label
until the control labels display. Continue by pressing the
desired button below the control labels on the display.
For more information on the control label displays,
see the following:
• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for normal mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating positions.
• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for the driver to receive the best
possible sound quality.
• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
• Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen button
to enable Bose® Centerpoint signal processing
circuitry. Centerpoint produces a full vehicle
surround sound listening experience from a CD,
MP3/WMA, or XM stereo digital audio source and
delivers five independent audio channels from
conventional two channel stereo recordings.
(Not available for AM, FM, or auxiliary sources.)
DSP is only available on vehicles that have the Bose
Premium audio system.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM stations while the radio is in the XM mode. To find
XM channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays. Another
way to select a category is to press the s REV or
\ FWD button until the desired category is
selected.
2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below the
desired category tab to immediately tune to the
first XM station associated with that category.
3. Turn the a knob, press the pushbuttons below
the displayed right or left arrows, or press either
SEEK arrow to go to the previous or the next
XM station within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the a knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
4-97
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The CAT button also toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Radio Message
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play the track number displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4-107 later in this
section for further detail.
4-98
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
Care of The CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
The CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
for two seconds to eject all discs, if one or more
discs are loaded.
4-99
a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): With
the random setting, CD tracks can be played in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a
six-disc CD player. To use random:
• Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab
until Randomize Current Disc displays to play the
tracks in random order from the CD that is currently
playing. Press again to turn off random play.
• Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab
s
REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks
can be played in random, rather than sequential
order. This feature is not available in playlist mode.
To use random, do the following:
1. To play tracks in random order from the CD that is
currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label. The random icon displays.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random
play. The random icon is no longer highlighted.
4-100
until Randomize All Discs displays to play tracks from
all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random
order. Press again to turn off random play.
4
(Information): Press to switch the display between
the track number, elapsed time of the track, and
the time. When the ignition is off, press to display
the time (if the clock display is enabled). See
“Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock” under,
Setting the Clock on page 4-89 for more information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,
see Using an MP3 on page 4-102 later in this section.
CD Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the
CD ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the
data file format.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an
external audio device such as an iPod™, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 5-2 for more information on driver
distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When connecting an auxiliary device, the radio
automatically detects the device and “Aux Input Device”
displays. The device begins playing audio over the
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already been
connected, the device does not begin playing audio
until the radio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.
4-101
O
Compressed Audio
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
power it off.
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the
CAT button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
(Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to do
additional volume adjustments from the portable device.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Using an MP3
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,
and album can display when files are recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
4-102
one disc.
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a
large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T
folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows. An
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum cannot be accessed.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists
(Px) are always accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
4-103
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing
the S c and c T folder buttons,
the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
4-104
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists
must have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T
folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are played
sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to reverse
or advance through the currently playing song.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If it is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder):
Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in
the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
\
FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random:
1. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays to play
MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random
order. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
4-105
2. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays to play
songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player
in random order. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It may take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin
playing while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW
begins playing again.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
have played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to
listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button. The
CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical
order. Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist displays.
4-106
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
Back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
have played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below
the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.
XM Radio Messages
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after
having the vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
4-107
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more information
on compatible phones.
4-108
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and
natural voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is
used if the volume is turned down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4-119 for more
information.
b g (Push To Talk):
Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook):
Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle
is moving.
4-109
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle,
the system will say “Is connected” after the
connected phone.
4-110
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re-entered.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
4-111
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
4-112
Using the Delete Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let’s try again,
please say the name tag.”
main menu.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
Re-dial
4-113
Using the Dial Command
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
4-114
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
4-115
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Press
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4-116
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
Three-Way Calling
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.
c x to end a call.
b g to link all
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
4-117
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
FCC information.
4-118
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
c x (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if
a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end
a current call.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar® systems press
and hold for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4-108 or
the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than two seconds to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w
(Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
¨
(Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while
in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next
track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot.
Press the ¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to
the next disc while sourced to a CD player.
4-119
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
4-120
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post on
the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with
sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
4-121
✍ NOTES
4-122
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunk Driving .................................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-3
Braking .........................................................5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................5-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-6
Magnetic Ride Control™ ..................................5-7
Steering ........................................................5-8
Off-Road Recovery .........................................5-9
Passing .......................................................5-10
Loss of Control .............................................5-10
Driving at Night ............................................5-11
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-12
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-13
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-13
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-14
Winter Driving ..............................................5-15
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................5-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-17
Loading the Vehicle ......................................5-18
Towing ..........................................................5-24
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-24
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-24
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-26
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2-12.
{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-6.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-52.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking.
5-3
Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
5-4
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4-53.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
StabiliTrak® System
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor operating might be heard and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
The vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic
brake control module increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal
pressure is quickly decreased.
The StabiliTrak system comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. The system cannot be
turned off.
This light will flash when
the system is operating.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning
light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)
for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until
the light has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.
5-5
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will flash when the system is operating.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 4-54 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on
page 4-54 for more information. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message is displayed and
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on if there is a problem with the
system. When this light and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are on, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the
front wheels are spinning too much or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the front
brakes and reduces engine power (by closing the throttle
and managing engine spark) to limit wheel spin.
5-6
The TCS and StabiliTrak®
light will flash when the
system is limiting
wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 4-54 for more information.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4-12.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message in
the DIC and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes on
if there is a problem with the traction control system.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located in front
of the shift lever.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, always leave the system turned on.
TCS can be turned off if needed.
The system can be turned on or off at any time by
pressing the TCS button. The DIC will display
TRACTION CONTROL OFF when the button is pressed,
and part of the traction control system is disabled.
The vehicle will still have brake-traction control, but will
not be able to use the engine speed management
system. System noises may be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control working. If the controller detects
excessive wheel spin in this mode, the TCS/StabiliTrak
light may blink.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 5-17.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3 for more information.
Magnetic Ride Control™
The vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of the vehicle. The
controller receives input from the system to determine
the proper ride. If the controller detects a problem within
the system, the Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-67
for more information. If this message appears, have the
vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer.
Electronically Controlled Air Ride
Suspension
Professional Vehicles may have Electronically Controlled
Air Suspension. The air ride controller receives input
from the system to determine the proper ride. If
the controller detects a problem with the system, the
DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS
message. If this message appears, have the vehicle
serviced at your dealer/retailer.
5-7
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort felt when
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
5-8
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 5-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to
5 inches), about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
5-9
Passing
Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
5-10
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, the system may be
active. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-5.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions.
It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle
control more limited.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until the
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
•
•
•
•
•
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
5-11
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
5-12
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-46.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
5-13
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
5-14
{ WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-6
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but
slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5-4 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-15
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Service on page 8-7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
WARNING:
• Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
•
•
{ WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
WARNING:
5-16
(Continued)
(Continued)
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-17.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6-70.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-24.
5-17
Loading the Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
5-18
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions
(A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight
(B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C)
and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6-46 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-54.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and
Loading Information label specific to your vehicle
will be provided and installed by the final body
manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information
label, should be attached to the B-pillar of your
vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’s manual
or contact them directly. The label shows the
original tires installed on your professional vehicle
and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures
for those tires. The label also tells you the
professional vehicle’s capacity weight.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
3.
4.
5.
6.
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” for important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
5-19
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
5-20
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Example 3
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
5-21
Certification Label
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the
vehicle specific Certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer. The coach-builder
should be consulted if the final stage
manufacturer’s label is not present. The Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be on
the driver’s door edge.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit” earlier in this section.
{ WARNING:
A vehiclespecific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or rear axle.
5-22
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{ WARNING:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level
as the load changes. It is automatic, you do
not need to adjust anything.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected to
the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the
vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height. The
system is activated when the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle
height thereafter. The system may exhaust
(lower vehicle height) for up to ten minutes after
the ignition key has been turned to LOCK/OFF.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
5-23
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See
Roadside Service on page 8-7.
• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Does the vehicle have the proper towing
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-24
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5-13.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. Use a dolly if the vehicle
must be towed. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section
for more information.
Dolly Towing
The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow the
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
5-25
Towing a Trailer
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.
{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
5-26
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the driver and the
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
• If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and it doesn’t seem to be working properly
while pulling a trailer, turn the system off. See Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3-43 for more
information.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
5-27
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-6 for
more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18 for more
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
5-28
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-18. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here are some
rules to follow:
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not tap into
the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust can
get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 3-34 for more information.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained
properly.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
5-29
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
5-30
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-27.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-31
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 for more
information. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil,
belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea
to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-32
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 6-27.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................6-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of the Vehicle .............................................6-5
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-6
California Fuel ...............................................6-6
Additives .......................................................6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-10
Hood Release ..............................................6-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-12
Engine Oil ...................................................6-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-17
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-19
Cooling System ............................................6-22
Engine Coolant .............................................6-23
Engine Overheating .......................................6-27
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................6-29
Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-30
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-31
Brakes ........................................................6-32
Battery ........................................................6-34
Jump Starting ...............................................6-36
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-40
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-43
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............6-43
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-44
Tires ..............................................................6-46
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-52
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-54
High-Speed Operation ...................................6-56
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-57
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................6-58
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-64
Buying New Tires .........................................6-64
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-68
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-68
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Chains ..................................................6-70
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-70
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ....................6-71
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage .........6-79
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................6-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................6-81
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................6-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............6-88
Spare Tire ...................................................6-90
Appearance Care ............................................6-91
Interior Cleaning ...........................................6-91
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-92
Leather .......................................................6-93
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................6-94
Wood Panels ...............................................6-94
Speaker Covers ............................................6-94
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-95
Weatherstrips ...............................................6-95
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-95
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-96
6-2
Finish Care ..................................................6-96
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-97
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ..................................................6-97
Tires ...........................................................6-98
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-98
Finish Damage .............................................6-98
Underbody Maintenance ................................6-98
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-99
Vehicle Identification ......................................6-99
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-99
Service Parts Identification Label ...................6-100
Electrical System ..........................................6-100
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................6-100
Headlamp Wiring ........................................6-100
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................6-100
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......6-101
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................6-101
Underhood Fuse Block ................................6-101
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................6-104
Capacities and Specifications ........................6-109
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-73.
6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-72.
6-4
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Maintenance Record on page 7-12.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the
vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced, and
a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock, might be heard. If the octane is less
than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise when
you drive.
6-5
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4-57. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives on page 6-6 for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a
smog-check test.
6-6
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every
engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for
service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
6-7
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
6-8
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4-57.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-67 for more information.
{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-95.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-57.
6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-10
{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To lift the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located
on the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever, located near the
center of the hood. Move the release lever up and
to the right to raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
6-12
A. Underhood Fuse Block on page 6-101.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 6-36.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-31.
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Engine Coolant on page 6-23.
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6-36.
F. Power Steering Fluid on page 6-30.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-13.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-13.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-32.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick
(Out of View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 6-19.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-17.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-13
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-109.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
6-14
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for
this vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
6-15
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
6-16
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on. Change the
oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained people who will perform
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
being turned on, reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset:
1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position without
starting the engine.
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING is
displayed. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4-62.
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100%
is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
6-17
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
To inspect or replace the filter:
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to
the two hinges located on the inboard side of
the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter and any loose
debris that may be found in the air cleaner base.
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
To reinstall the cover:
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of
the cover.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and
align the two screws.
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover.
1. Remove the two screws on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover.
6-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7-8.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
6-19
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).
6-20
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), you may
have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Locate the transmission fluid cap which is located
next to the radiator hose and below the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly on the driver side of the
vehicle. The cap is marked TRANS FLUID.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for more information on location.
2. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly
to reach the transmission fluid cap, turn the cap
counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-8.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter assembly.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-8.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the
handle clockwise.
6-21
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
6-22
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-27.
6-23
What to Use
{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
6-24
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,
and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-8 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-23 for more information.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do
not spill coolant on a hot engine.
6-25
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot.
6-26
2. Keep turning the cap and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge
tank with the proper
mixture to the
FULL COLD mark
on the side of
the coolant surge tank.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the engine
and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator
hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on
the side of the coolant surge tank.
There is an engine temperature warning light and/or
gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4-55 and
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 4-56.
The vehicle may also display a ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-67 for more information. You will
also hear a chime.
5. Replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight and
fully seated.
6-27
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 6-29 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 6-29 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
6-28
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while
stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn
off the engine until it cools down. Also, see ″Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode″ next in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and
engine performance. This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 6-13.
6-29
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located next to
the underhood fuse
block on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12
for more information
on location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean
rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-8.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-8.
6-30
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-67 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
6-31
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
reservoir location and
access.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
6-32
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-67.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-8.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-95.
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
6-33
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-109.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for the vehicle, the balance between the front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance expected can change in many other ways if
the wrong replacement brake parts are installed.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Battery
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly.
6-34
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed.
{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery is under the rear seat cushion. To access
the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Block on
page 6-104. Access to the battery is not necessary to
jump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 6-36.
{ WARNING:
A battery that is not properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage the rear
seat safety belt systems. You might not be able to
see this damage and the safety belts might not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If a
replacement battery is ever needed, it must be
vented in the same manner as the original battery.
Always make sure that the vent hose is properly
reattached before reinstalling the seat cushion.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery and
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).
6-35
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 6-36 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
6-36
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal.
4.6L LD8 Engine shown,
4.6L L37 Engine
similar
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the
terminal. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal.
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on
the rear underseat fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located behind
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.
It is marked GND (−).
6-37
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote terminals are for
that purpose.
{ WARNING:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
6-38
{ WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
6-39
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-40
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
Notice: To make sure the headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6-11
for more information.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.
2. Find the center line running through the lens of the
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the center
line running through the lens of the headlamp.
6-41
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
6-42
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. They
are located under the hood near each headlamp
assembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.
Each one is the top outboard screw by the “ V” on the
cover panel next to the aiming flap.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
hex wrench.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your
dealer/retailer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{ WARNING:
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that
the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
6-43
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here is how to remove the
wiper blade:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Lit the windshield wiper arm and blade away from
the windshield.
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point and
pull the blade assembly down toward the windshield
to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.
6-44
To remove and replace the wiper blade element:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. Replace the element by starting at the heel end of
the wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the
base of the wiper arm, and slide the wiper
blade element, notched end last, into the wiper
blade claw sets.
3. Engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element by squeezing the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set and all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the wiper
blade element on both sides.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7-10.
6-45
Tires
WARNING:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{ WARNING:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-18.
WARNING:
6-46
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 6-56 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
6-47
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 6-67.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire
or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See Spare Tire on page 6-90 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 6-70.
6-48
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54 and Spare Tire on page 6-90.
6-49
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Light Truck Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-50
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Size
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
The following illustration shows an example of a
tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
6-51
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
6-52
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-18.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
6-53
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6-64.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-67.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
6-54
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18. How you load
your vehicle affects the vehicle handling and
ride comfort, never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. If your vehicle has a
compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information see Spare Tire on
page 6-90.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-55
Professional Vehicle
The proper inflation of the tires on your
professional vehicle depends on the type of tires
on it.
• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the
cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).
• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires,
the cold inflation pressure depends on the
vehicle mass and should be determined by the
vehicle coach-builder. A Tire and Loading
Information label provided by the final stage
manufacturer should be attached to the B-pillar
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the final
stage manufacturer’s label is not present,
the coach-builder should be consulted. Do not
use the tire pressures indicated on the
General Motors label. These tire pressures are
for the incomplete vehicle and are not the
correct tire pressures for the completed
professional vehicle.
Operation at inflation pressures below this
recommendation may cause your tires to become
overloaded.
6-56
High-Speed Operation
{ WARNING:
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-18.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
6-57
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-58
for additional information.
6-58
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,
excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-62 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-67.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-18, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-62 and Tires on page 6-46.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6-71 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
6-59
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6-64.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
6-60
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the
TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6-64 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-64
and Wheel Replacement on page 6-68 for
more information.
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
not be included in the tire rotation process.
Use the four-tire rotation pattern shown.
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern
6-62
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare
tire and wheel assembly that matches the original
equipment tires and wheels in size, type and
brand. The correct five-tire rotation pattern
is shown.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. See
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-57.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-109.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-80.
6-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
6-64
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6-47
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-62
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires
of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire and
wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire and wheel, they have the same overall
diameter as your vehicle’s full-size tires and
wheels. Because they were designed and
developed for use on your vehicle, it is all right to
drive your vehicle with the compact spare installed
properly. Compact spare tires are designed for
temporary use only. See Spare Tire on page 6-90.
6-65
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on
the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-57.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-18, for more information about
the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
6-66
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance
and safety if tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may increase the
chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-64 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
6-67
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law. It should be
noted that the temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can
sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer/retailer if
any of these conditions exist.
Your GM dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
6-68
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle
have five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6-80 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-69
Tire Chains
{ WARNING:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
6-70
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, follow the instructions below. To use the tire
sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6-71.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
{ WARNING:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
6-71
{ WARNING:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
6-72
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service on
page 8-7.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
Tire Sealant
The kit includes:
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
On/Off Button
Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Air Only)
Pressure Relief Button
Pressure Gage
Air Only Hose (Black)
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
Power Plug
6-73
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6-70. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 6-79.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
6-74
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4-34.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) clockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (D) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly
drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with
air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gage (D). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54.
The pressure gage (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off
until the correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the
power plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (G) back in their original location.
6-75
16. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister and place
it in a highly visible
location. The label is a
reminder not to
exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the
damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on page 8-7.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with local state codes and practices.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
6-76
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto the tire valve stem
by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4-34.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6-70.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage on page 6-79.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) counterclockwise to the
Air Only position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (E) and the power plug (G).
6-77
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gage (D). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-54.
The pressure gage (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (E) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Replace the air only hose (E) and the power
plug (G) and cord back in its original location.
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
6-78
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the plastic cover.
Unscrew the connector (B) from the canister (A).
Pull up on the canister (A) to remove it.
Replace with a new canister which is available from
your dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-12.
2. Lift the cover.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire
sealant and compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.
6-79
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 4-3.
WARNING:
(Continued)
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
{ WARNING:
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed.
WARNING:
(Continued)
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
6-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment needed is in the trunk. To access
the equipment:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-12 for more
information.
2. Press the area at the
front of the handle
located on the cover so
that the back edge
raises.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.
6-81
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds
the wrench and jack.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from
the trunk. See Spare Tire on page 6-90 for more
information.
6-82
The tools to be used are the jack (A) and the wheel
wrench (B).
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 6-80 for more information.
3. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen them using
the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
2. For models having aluminum wheels with a center
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench to
gently pry the wheel covers off. Store the wheel
cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the
flat tire repaired or replaced. Be careful not to scratch
the aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove it
with your hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts with the
wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
6-83
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING:
4. Find the jacking location from the diagram above
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the
plastic molding.
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear
location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.
6-84
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
5. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
6. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into
the channel of the jack head.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
9. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.
7. Put the spare tire near you.
6-85
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
11. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6-80.
6-86
12. Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6-109 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6-109 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
6-87
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{ WARNING:
5-Wheel Nuts
8-Wheel Nuts
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
6-88
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, store
the flat tire in your trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised
until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Cover
Wing Nut
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Jack Container
Spare Tire
Bolt
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3-12.
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F), face down, making sure
to line up the wheel center hole with the bolt (G)
and place it on the compartment floor.
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).
Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into the
center of the spare tire making sure to line up
the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the
compartment floor.
4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container with
the retainer (C) and then the wing nut (B).
5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).
6-89
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire
at a time could result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a crash and you or
others could be injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
This vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although the
compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle
was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
6-90
Spare Tire
This vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when new,
was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air over time, so
check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-54 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-18 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instructions on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6-83.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tire originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-91
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
6-92
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
TEHAMA™ Leather
The leather surface on the seat was not designed to be
aggressively cleaned using any commercial product.
Use a well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove
dust. Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather
surface with water. Allow the leather to dry naturally. If a
soil occurs that cannot be completely removed, allow
it to become part of the natural markings of the leather.
The leather in the vehicle was designed to have a
natural appearance and develop a more vintage
appearance with use.
6-93
Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean
leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers on
leather. It is very important to not use any commercial
leather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather. Not only are those products
not necessary, they will permanently and adversely
change the appearance and feel of the leather. Never
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior. Never
use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
6-94
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-8.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the
6-95
vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-95.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
6-96
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
6-97
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
6-98
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6-109 for
the vehicle’s engine code.
6-99
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the spare tire cover, has the following
information:
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
6-100
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-72 and Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2-73.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have the headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse
cover and secondary service cover to access the
fuse block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
6-101
Fuses
1
2
3
4
6-102
Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM), Crank
Fuel Injectors Odd
Fuel Injectors Even
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuses
5
6
7
8
Usage
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Oxygen Sensor
Emission Device
Transmission, Ignition 1
Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Climate Control System, Instrument
Panel Cluster Ignition 1
Airbag System
Horn
Windshield Wiper
Fog Lamps
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Washer Pump Motor
Left Front Cornering Lamp
Right Front Cornering Lamp
Air Pump (J-Case)
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(J-Case)
Fuses
24
25
26
27
Relays
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Usage
Starter (J-Case)
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Motor (J-Case)
Cooling Fan 2 (J-Case)
Cooling Fan 1 (J-Case)
Usage
Powertrain
Starter
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 1
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Ignition
Air Pump
6-103
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on
the driver side. The rear seat cushion must be removed
to access the rear fuse block.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a
short that could damage the battery and or wires.
Avoid contact between the rear seat and the
fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall the
rear seat. Do not remove covers from any of
the covered parts, and do not store anything under
the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.
6-104
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, near
the battery cable.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
WARNING:
(Continued)
not been routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next passenger.
The person sitting in that position could be badly
injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
{ WARNING:
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
A safety belt that is not properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt has
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
WARNING:
(Continued)
6-105
Fuses
1
2
3
4
6-106
Usage
Fuel Pump
Left Park Lamp
Run 3 - Rear Blower
Right Park Lamp
Fuses
5
6
7
Usage
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
Memory Module
Right Park Lamp (optional)
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Usage
Steering Wheel Illumination
Front Heated/Cooled Seat Module
Run 2 - Heated/Cooled Seats
Rear Heated Seat Module
RPA Module
PASS-Key® III System
Unlock/Lock Module
Magnetic Ride Control
Not Used
Sunroof
Body Control Module (BCM) Dim
Body Control Module (BCM)
Run 1-Heated Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
Driver Door Module
Rear Lumbar
Electronic Leveling Control Module
Body Control Module
(Left Turn Signal)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Fuses
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Usage
Navigation (Optional)
Retained Accessory Power 1 (RAP)
Passenger Door Module
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Accessory Power Outlets
Body Control Module (BCM)
(Inadvertent)
Retained Accessory Power 2 (RAP)
Canister Vent Solenoid
Body Control Module (Courtesy)
Body Control Module
(Right Turn Signal)
Trunk Release
Amplifier, Radio
Body Control Module (CHMSL)
Body Control Module
Stoplamp (optional)
OnStar® Module
Body Modules
Radio
Door Unlatch (optional)
6-107
Fuses
46
47
48
49
Resistor
50
Relays
51
52
53
58
59
60
61
6-108
Usage
Rear Defogger (J-Case)
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor (J-Case)
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
Usage
Terminating Resistor
Usage
Front Blower (optional)
Rear Defogger
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor
Park Lamps
Fuel Pump
License Plate Lamp (optional)
Right Park Lamp (optional)
Relays
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Circuit
Breakers
54
55
56
57
Usage
Unlock
Lock
Run
Not Used
Door Unlatch (optional)
Trunk Release
Stoplamp (optional)
Overhead Lamps (optional)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Usage
Right Front Seat
Left Front Power Seat
Power Windows
Power Tilt Steering Wheel
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-8 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label
located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer
for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
12.6 qt
12.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
7.5 qt
7.1 L
18.5 gal
70.0 L
7.4 qt
7.0 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid (Bottom Pan Removal)
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine
Engine
Y
Automatic
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine
9
Automatic
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
6-109
✍ NOTES
6-110
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-3
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................7-8
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................7-10
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................7-11
Maintenance Record .....................................7-12
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
{ WARNING:
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-18.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-5.
7-2
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6-4.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer /retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-8 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 7-10. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6-62.
Scheduled Maintenance
If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service
the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last
service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil
is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Every Engine Oil Change
• Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-13. An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-13. An Emission Control Service.
• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work and reset the system.
page 6-23.
Washer Fluid on page 6-31.
• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54.
• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-62.
• Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-62.
7-3
• Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
• Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-17.
• Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
• Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
• Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
• Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and wiper
blade cleaning, if contaminated. See Windshield
and Wiper Blades on page 6-97. Worn or damaged
wiper blade replacement. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 6-44.
• Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
console hinges, and glove box door hinges
lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-8. More frequent lubrication
may be required when vehicle is exposed to a
corrosive environment.
7-4
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
• Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2-74.
• Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding
fluid, if needed. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-19.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
• Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6-13.
• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-31.
Once a Month
• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-54.
• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-62.
Once a Year
• Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-6.
• Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-6.
• Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7-6.
• Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7-6.
• Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on page 6-22.
• Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection
for loose or damaged components.
• Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
• Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
• Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). More
frequent replacement may be required if vehicle
is driven regularly under dusty conditions.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
• Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-17.
• Automatic transmission fluid and filter change
(severe service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-19.
binding. Replace if needed.
7-5
First Engine Oil Change After Every
120 000 km/75,000 Miles
• Professional Vehicle Only: Engine cooling system
drain, flush, and refill, cooling system and cap
pressure check, and cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser (or every 5 years,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant
on page 6-23. An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
• Automatic transmission fluid and filter change
(normal service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-19.
• Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
• Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
• Except Professional Vehicle: Engine cooling system
drain, flush, and refill, cooling system and cap
pressure check, and cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser (or every 5 years,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant
on page 6-23. An Emission Control Service.
7-6
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-30.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3-30.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only
in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-7
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{ WARNING:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-8
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
Engine Oil
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. Look for
and use only oil that meets GM
Standard GM4718M. For the proper
viscosity, see Engine Oil on
page 6-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 6-23.
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake DOT
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in
System
Canada 88862807).
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake No.
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 3634770, in
Weatherstrip Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Conditioning
Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
7-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
Driver Side - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
Passenger Side - 21.7 in (55.0 cm)
7-10
GM Part Number
22676970
89017342
25906375
12571535
ACDelco Part Number
A1627C
PF61
CF118C
41–987
15931977
15931976
—
—
Engine Drive Belt Routing
4.6L V8 Engines
7-11
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
7-12
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-13
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
7-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-5
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................8-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-7
Roadside Service ...........................................8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................8-11
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................8-11
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-13
Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States Government .................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian Government ......................8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....8-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................8-18
Event Data Recorders ...................................8-19
OnStar® ......................................................8-20
Navigation System ........................................8-20
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................8-20
Radio Frequency Statement ...........................8-20
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is
why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
8-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following
address:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
8-6
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
8-7
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
8-8
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made many times.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 year/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
8-9
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car
towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-10
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation Program
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Several courtesy transportation options are available
to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
8-11
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
8-12
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
8-13
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
8-14
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for
help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only
if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed
to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other
parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Service on
page 8-7
Gather the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driver’s name, address, phone number
Driver’s license number
Owner’s name, address, phone number
Vehicle license plate
Vehicle make, model and model year
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Insurance company and policy number
General description of the damage to the other
vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality
replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? on page 2-66.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
8-17
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-18
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
8-19
OnStar®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar
services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
8-20
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 3-24
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 4-34
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 4-15
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 6-100
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-17
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 4-44
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 2-73
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 2-65
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 2-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 2-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 2-66
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 2-63
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 2-60
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 4-51
Readiness Light .......................................... 4-50
System Check ............................................. 2-58
Analog Clock .................................................. 4-35
Antenna
Backglass ................................................. 4-121
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ... 4-121
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 5-4
Warning Light ............................................. 4-53
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 6-97
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 6-99
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 6-96
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 6-92
Finish Care ................................................. 6-96
Finish Damage ............................................ 6-98
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 6-94
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 6-91
Leather ...................................................... 6-93
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 6-98
Speaker Covers .......................................... 6-94
Tires .......................................................... 6-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 6-98
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 6-95
Weatherstrips .............................................. 6-95
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 6-97
Wood Panels .............................................. 6-94
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 4-35
1
Audio System ................................................. 4-88
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 4-119
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ............................ 4-108
Radio Reception ........................................ 4-120
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-89
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 4-119
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 4-121
Audio System(s) ............................................. 4-92
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 6-19
Operation ................................................... 3-27
B
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 4-121
Battery .......................................................... 6-34
Electric Power Management .......................... 4-33
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 4-30
Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 4-33
Load Management ....................................... 4-32
Run-Down Protection ................................... 4-34
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 7-11
Bluetooth® .................................................... 4-108
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 5-5
2
Brakes .......................................................... 6-32
Antilock ....................................................... 5-4
Parking ...................................................... 3-30
System Warning Light .................................. 4-52
Braking ........................................................... 5-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 3-22
Bulb Replacement
Fog Lamps ................................................. 4-30
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-40
Headlamps ................................................. 6-43
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 6-43
Buying New Tires ........................................... 6-64
C
Calibration ............................................. 2-11, 3-36
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 6-4
Warning ....................................................... 6-4
California Fuel .................................................. 6-6
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 6-109
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 3-34
Trunk ......................................................... 3-12
Winter Driving ............................................. 5-15
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 6-95
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 4-102
Center Console Storage ................................... 3-55
Center Flex Storage Unit ................................. 3-56
Center Seat ..................................................... 2-9
Central Door Unlock System ............................. 3-10
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-70
Charging System Light .................................... 4-52
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 4-57
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 6-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 6-99
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ........................... 2-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 2-45
Older Children ............................................. 2-33
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ........................ 2-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 2-54
Systems ..................................................... 2-41
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 2-44
Circuit Breakers ............................................ 6-101
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................
Interior .......................................................
Leather ......................................................
Speaker Covers ..........................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Wood Panels ..............................................
Climate Control System
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Climate Control Systems
Dual ..........................................................
Rear ..........................................................
Climate Controls .............................................
Clock ............................................................
Clock, Setting .................................................
Collision Damage Repair ..................................
Compass ............................................... 2-11,
6-97
6-96
6-92
6-96
6-94
6-91
6-93
6-94
6-98
6-98
6-95
6-95
6-97
6-94
4-41
4-36
4-42
1-14
4-35
4-89
8-13
3-36
3
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant ............................ 6-71
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 3-19
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 3-56
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 6-23
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 4-56
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 4-55
Cooling System .............................................. 6-22
Cornering Lamps ............................................ 4-30
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 4-31
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 8-11
Cruise Control ................................................ 4-12
Light .......................................................... 4-60
Cruise Control, Active ...................................... 4-15
Cruise Control, Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System ........................................................ 4-6
Cupholders .................................................... 3-55
Customer Assistance ......................................... 8-6
Offices ......................................................... 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 8-2
4
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 8-13
Data Recorders, Event .................................... 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 4-29
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Disc, MP3 .................................................... 4-102
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Door
Central Door Unlocking System ..................... 3-10
Locks .......................................................... 3-9
Power Locks ............................................... 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-10
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 4-61
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 4-62
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 4-80
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-67
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-11
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 5-13
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunk .......................................................... 5-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 5-13
Driving (cont.)
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-14
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-12
Loss of Control ........................................... 5-10
Off-Road Recovery ........................................ 5-9
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-17
Winter ........................................................ 5-15
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ....................... 1-22
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 4-36
E
EDR ............................................................. 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On .......................... 6-100
Electrical System
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 6-101
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 6-100
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 6-101
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 6-104
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 6-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 6-100
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 3-21
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ...........................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ...........
Compartment Overview ................................
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................
Cooling System ...........................................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Oil
Life System ................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders .....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
3-21
6-17
4-57
6-12
6-23
3-26
4-56
4-55
6-22
7-11
3-34
6-13
6-29
6-27
3-24
6-16
4-31
8-19
2-33
4-25
4-30
5
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-17
Finish Damage ............................................... 6-98
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 4-3
Flash-to-Pass ................................................. 4-10
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-70
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 6-80
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 6-88
Floor Mats ..................................................... 3-56
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-19
Power Steering ........................................... 6-30
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-31
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 4-30
Light .......................................................... 4-60
Footwell Lamps .............................................. 4-32
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System .................. 4-6
Front Storage Area ......................................... 3-55
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-6
California Fuel .............................................. 6-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 6-8
6
Fuel (cont.)
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-7
Gage ......................................................... 4-61
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-6
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better ......................................... 1-22
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 6-101
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 6-104
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 6-101
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 6-100
G
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 4-56
Fuel .......................................................... 4-61
Speedometer .............................................. 4-48
Tachometer ................................................. 4-48
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 3-48
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-5
Specifications ............................................... 6-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 3-55
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-7
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 4-3
Head Restraints ............................................... 2-2
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 6-100
Headlamps
Aiming ....................................................... 6-40
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-43
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 4-29
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 4-25
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 4-10
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 6-43
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-6
On Reminder .............................................. 4-29
Wiper Activated ........................................... 4-29
Heated
Steering Wheel ............................................. 4-4
Heated Seats ................................................... 2-5
Heater
Engine Coolant ........................................... 3-26
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 4-61
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 6-56
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-13
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-14
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-10
Release ..................................................... 6-11
Horn ............................................................... 4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 2-17
Ignition Positions ............................................. 3-23
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 4-33
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 2-37
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 6-54
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 4-31
Cluster ....................................................... 4-47
Introduction ...................................................... 7-2
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-36
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System ................................... 3-4
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 3-4
Keys ............................................................... 3-3
7
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Cornering ...................................................
Courtesy ....................................................
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Footwell .....................................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Reading .....................................................
Lane Departure Warning ..................................
Lane Departure Warning Light ..........................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System for Child Restraints ...................
Lighting
Entry .........................................................
Parade Dimming ..........................................
Lights
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Exterior Lamps ............................................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Fog Lamps .................................................
8
6-47
4-30
4-31
4-29
4-30
4-32
4-57
4-32
3-46
4-55
2-32
2-26
2-45
4-31
4-31
4-50
4-53
4-52
4-52
4-60
4-55
4-25
4-10
4-60
Lights (cont.)
Highbeam On ............................................. 4-61
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-6
Lane Departure Warning ............................... 4-55
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 4-60
Oil Pressure ............................................... 4-59
On Reminder .............................................. 4-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 4-51
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 4-49
Security ..................................................... 4-60
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 4-54
Tire Pressure .............................................. 4-56
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 4-54
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-18
Lockout Switch, Valet ...................................... 3-18
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ..................... 3-10
Door ........................................................... 3-9
Lockout Protection ....................................... 3-11
Power Door ................................................ 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 3-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-10
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 2-45
Lumbar
Massaging Controls ....................................... 2-4
Power Controls ............................................. 2-4
Lumbar Controls, Rear Power ........................... 2-11
M
N
Magnetic Ride Control ....................................... 5-7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 7-10
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............... 7-8
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 4-57
Massaging Lumbar Controls ............................... 2-4
Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls .... 2-6
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-67
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 3-36
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and
Temperature ............................................ 2-11
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 3-38
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 3-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 3-39
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 3-37
Park Tilt ..................................................... 3-39
MP3 ............................................................ 4-102
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 8-20
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ............................... 4-108
Net, Convenience ........................................... 3-56
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 3-22
O
Object Detection, Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ...... 3-43
Odometer ...................................................... 4-48
Off-Road
Recovery ..................................................... 5-9
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 6-13
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 6-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-59
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 2-33
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 8-20
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 3-49
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 4-41
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 4-34
9
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 3-38
Convex Mirror ............................................. 3-39
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 3-39
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 3-37
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 6-29
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-6
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
P
Paint, Damage ...............................................
Parade Dimming .............................................
Park
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Park Aid ........................................................
Park Tilt Mirrors ..............................................
Parking
Assist ........................................................
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .....................
Passenger Compartment Air Filter .....................
Passenger Sensing System ..............................
Passing .........................................................
10
6-98
4-31
3-31
3-32
3-40
3-39
3-40
3-30
3-33
4-51
4-44
2-67
5-10
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation ... 3-21
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 6-4
Performance Shifting ....................................... 3-29
Phone
Bluetooth® ................................................ 4-108
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 3-10
Electrical System ....................................... 6-101
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 2-4
Rear Lumbar Controls .................................. 2-11
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 2-8
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 3-24
Seat ............................................................ 2-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-30
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 4-4
Windows .................................................... 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 2-31
Privacy .......................................................... 8-18
Navigation System ....................................... 8-20
OnStar ....................................................... 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 6-4
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ..................................... 8-20
Statement ................................................... 8-20
Radio(s) ........................................................ 4-92
Radios
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ............................ 4-108
Reception ................................................. 4-120
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-89
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 4-119
Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................... 4-10
Reading Lamps .............................................. 4-32
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 4-42
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 3-10
Rear Heated Seats ......................................... 2-10
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 3-56
Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature .... 2-11
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 3-36
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 2-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .................. 7-8
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-24
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 6-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 6-81
Replacement Parts
Maintenance ............................................... 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 2-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 3-24
Roadside Service ............................................. 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-17
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 3-57
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 3-35
11
S
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 6-95
Extender .................................................... 2-33
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 2-17
Lap Belt ..................................................... 2-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 2-26
Reminders .................................................. 4-49
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 2-12
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 2-31
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government .................................. 8-16
General Motors ........................................... 8-16
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-3
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 8-11
Sealant Kit, Tire .............................................. 6-71
12
Seats
Center Seat .................................................. 2-9
Head Restraints ............................................ 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Seats ........................... 2-5
Heated Seats - Rear .................................... 2-10
Massaging Lumbar ........................................ 2-4
Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 2-6
Power Lumbar .............................................. 2-4
Power Lumbar, Rear .................................... 2-11
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 2-8
Power Seats ................................................. 2-3
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 2-53
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 2-51
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 2-54
Security
Light .......................................................... 4-60
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 6-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 4-57
Parts Identification Label ............................. 6-100
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-17
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 8-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 2-72
Setting the Clock ............................................ 4-89
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-98
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 3-32
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 3-31
Side Blind Zone Alert ...................................... 3-43
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 4-5
Spare Tire ..................................................... 6-90
Installing .................................................... 6-83
Removing ................................................... 6-81
Storing ....................................................... 6-88
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 6-109
Speedometer .................................................. 4-48
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ............................... 4-54
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 5-5
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 3-7
Starting the Engine ......................................... 3-24
Steering .......................................................... 5-8
Heated Wheel ............................................... 4-4
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 4-119
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ....................... 2-6
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 4-4
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 3-55
Center Flex Storage Unit .............................. 3-56
Convenience Net ......................................... 3-56
Cupholders ................................................. 3-55
Front Storage Area ...................................... 3-55
Glove Box .................................................. 3-55
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 3-56
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 6-79
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 5-17
Sun Visors ..................................................... 3-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 3-57
13
T
Tachometer .................................................... 4-48
Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 4-4
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 4-119
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 3-18
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 3-21
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 4-3
Time, Setting .................................................. 4-89
Tires ............................................................. 6-46
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 6-97
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-64
Chains ....................................................... 6-70
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 6-80
Cleaning .................................................... 6-98
Different Size .............................................. 6-66
14
Tires (cont.)
High-Speed Operation ..................................
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Installing the Spare Tire ................................
Pressure Light .............................................
Pressure Monitor Operation ...........................
Pressure Monitor System ..............................
Removing the Flat Tire .................................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Sealant and Compressor Kit ................. 6-71,
Sidewall Labeling .........................................
Spare Tire ..................................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............
Terminology and Definitions ...........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................
Wheel Replacement .....................................
When It Is Time for New Tires ......................
6-56
6-70
6-54
6-62
6-83
4-56
6-58
6-57
6-83
6-81
6-79
6-47
6-90
6-88
6-52
6-67
6-68
6-68
6-64
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-24
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-26
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-24
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-6
Control System Warning Light ....................... 4-54
Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 5-7
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 5-5
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-19
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 3-27
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 8-11
Trunk ............................................................ 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 4-5
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 3-18
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-3
Loading ...................................................... 5-18
Remote Start ................................................ 3-7
Running While Parked .................................. 3-35
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 4-80
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-99
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 6-100
Ventilated Seats ............................................... 2-5
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 4-41
Visors ........................................................... 3-17
U
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) ...........................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Universal Home Remote System .......................
Operation ...................................................
3-40
6-67
3-48
3-49
15
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 4-46
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-67
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 4-3
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-68
Different Size .............................................. 6-66
Replacement ............................................... 6-68
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 6-64
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 2-44
Windows ....................................................... 3-14
Power ........................................................ 3-15
16
Windshield
Washer ...................................................... 4-11
Washer Fluid .............................................. 6-31
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 6-44
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 6-97
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 6-100
Wipers ....................................................... 4-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-15
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 4-29
X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 4-107
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna ................................................... 4-121
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising